pmodules/bash
0
0
Fork 0
mirror of https://https.git.savannah.gnu.org/git/bash.git synced 2026-08-07 10:42:28 +02:00
Code Issues Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity

commit bash-20040107 snapshot

Browse Source
This commit is contained in:
Chet Ramey
2011-12-03 12:52:47 -05:00
parent d3a24ed242
commit 5e13499c55
522 changed files with 295985 additions and 19526 deletions
Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files
lib/doc-support/Makefile.in
+54
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
# simple makefile to create texindex
#
# Copyright (C) 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
# any later version.
# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
# GNU General Public License for more details.
# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA.
topdir = @top_srcdir@
srcdir = @srcdir@
VPATH = .:@srcdir@
BUILD_DIR = @BUILD_DIR@
CC = @CC@
RM = rm
SHELL = @MAKE_SHELL@
DEFS = @DEFS@
CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ @LOCAL_CFLAGS@
LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ @LOCAL_LDFLAGS@
CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@
INCLUDES = -I. -I../.. -I$(topdir)
CCFLAGS = $(CFLAGS) $(DEFS) $(CPPFLAGS) ${INCLUDES}
.c.o:
$(RM) -f $@
$(CC) $(CCFLAGS) -c $<
OBJECTS = texindex.o getopt.o getopt1.o
SOURCES = texindex.c getopt.c getopt1.c
all: texindex
texindex: $(OBJECTS)
$(CC) $(LDFLAGS) -o $@ $(OBJECTS) $(LIBS)
clean:
$(RM) $(OBJECTS) texindex
distclean mostlyclean realclean maintainer-clean: clean
$(RM) Makefile
lib/doc-support/getopt.c
+731
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,731 @@
/* Getopt for GNU.
NOTE: getopt is now part of the C library, so if you don't know what
"Keep this file name-space clean" means, talk to roland@gnu.ai.mit.edu
before changing it!
Copyright (C) 1987, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 1993
Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the
Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any
later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
/* NOTE!!! AIX requires this to be the first thing in the file.
Do not put ANYTHING before it! */
#if !defined (__GNUC__) && defined (_AIX)
#pragma alloca
#endif
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include "config.h"
#endif
#ifdef __GNUC__
#define alloca __builtin_alloca
#else /* not __GNUC__ */
#if defined (HAVE_ALLOCA_H) || (defined(sparc) && (defined(sun) || (!defined(USG) && !defined(SVR4) && !defined(__svr4__))))
#include <alloca.h>
#else
#ifndef _AIX
char *alloca ();
#endif
#endif /* alloca.h */
#endif /* not __GNUC__ */
#if !__STDC__ && !defined(const) && IN_GCC
#define const
#endif
/* This tells Alpha OSF/1 not to define a getopt prototype in <stdio.h>. */
#ifndef _NO_PROTO
#define _NO_PROTO
#endif
#include <stdio.h>
/* Comment out all this code if we are using the GNU C Library, and are not
actually compiling the library itself. This code is part of the GNU C
Library, but also included in many other GNU distributions. Compiling
and linking in this code is a waste when using the GNU C library
(especially if it is a shared library). Rather than having every GNU
program understand `configure --with-gnu-libc' and omit the object files,
it is simpler to just do this in the source for each such file. */
#if defined (_LIBC) || !defined (__GNU_LIBRARY__)
/* This needs to come after some library #include
to get __GNU_LIBRARY__ defined. */
#ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__
#undef alloca
/* Don't include stdlib.h for non-GNU C libraries because some of them
contain conflicting prototypes for getopt. */
#include <stdlib.h>
#else /* Not GNU C library. */
#define __alloca alloca
#endif /* GNU C library. */
/* If GETOPT_COMPAT is defined, `+' as well as `--' can introduce a
long-named option. Because this is not POSIX.2 compliant, it is
being phased out. */
/* #define GETOPT_COMPAT */
/* This version of `getopt' appears to the caller like standard Unix `getopt'
but it behaves differently for the user, since it allows the user
to intersperse the options with the other arguments.
As `getopt' works, it permutes the elements of ARGV so that,
when it is done, all the options precede everything else. Thus
all application programs are extended to handle flexible argument order.
Setting the environment variable POSIXLY_CORRECT disables permutation.
Then the behavior is completely standard.
GNU application programs can use a third alternative mode in which
they can distinguish the relative order of options and other arguments. */
#include "getopt.h"
/* For communication from `getopt' to the caller.
When `getopt' finds an option that takes an argument,
the argument value is returned here.
Also, when `ordering' is RETURN_IN_ORDER,
each non-option ARGV-element is returned here. */
char *optarg = 0;
/* Index in ARGV of the next element to be scanned.
This is used for communication to and from the caller
and for communication between successive calls to `getopt'.
On entry to `getopt', zero means this is the first call; initialize.
When `getopt' returns EOF, this is the index of the first of the
non-option elements that the caller should itself scan.
Otherwise, `optind' communicates from one call to the next
how much of ARGV has been scanned so far. */
/* XXX 1003.2 says this must be 1 before any call. */
int optind = 0;
/* The next char to be scanned in the option-element
in which the last option character we returned was found.
This allows us to pick up the scan where we left off.
If this is zero, or a null string, it means resume the scan
by advancing to the next ARGV-element. */
static char *nextchar;
/* Callers store zero here to inhibit the error message
for unrecognized options. */
int opterr = 1;
/* Set to an option character which was unrecognized.
This must be initialized on some systems to avoid linking in the
system's own getopt implementation. */
int optopt = '?';
/* Describe how to deal with options that follow non-option ARGV-elements.
If the caller did not specify anything,
the default is REQUIRE_ORDER if the environment variable
POSIXLY_CORRECT is defined, PERMUTE otherwise.
REQUIRE_ORDER means don't recognize them as options;
stop option processing when the first non-option is seen.
This is what Unix does.
This mode of operation is selected by either setting the environment
variable POSIXLY_CORRECT, or using `+' as the first character
of the list of option characters.
PERMUTE is the default. We permute the contents of ARGV as we scan,
so that eventually all the non-options are at the end. This allows options
to be given in any order, even with programs that were not written to
expect this.
RETURN_IN_ORDER is an option available to programs that were written
to expect options and other ARGV-elements in any order and that care about
the ordering of the two. We describe each non-option ARGV-element
as if it were the argument of an option with character code 1.
Using `-' as the first character of the list of option characters
selects this mode of operation.
The special argument `--' forces an end of option-scanning regardless
of the value of `ordering'. In the case of RETURN_IN_ORDER, only
`--' can cause `getopt' to return EOF with `optind' != ARGC. */
static enum
{
REQUIRE_ORDER, PERMUTE, RETURN_IN_ORDER
} ordering;
#ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__
/* We want to avoid inclusion of string.h with non-GNU libraries
because there are many ways it can cause trouble.
On some systems, it contains special magic macros that don't work
in GCC. */
#include <string.h>
#define my_index strchr
#define my_bcopy(src, dst, n) memcpy ((dst), (src), (n))
#else
/* Avoid depending on library functions or files
whose names are inconsistent. */
char *getenv ();
static char *
my_index (str, chr)
const char *str;
int chr;
{
while (*str)
{
if (*str == chr)
return (char *) str;
str++;
}
return 0;
}
static void
my_bcopy (from, to, size)
const char *from;
char *to;
int size;
{
int i;
for (i = 0; i < size; i++)
to[i] = from[i];
}
#endif /* GNU C library. */
/* Handle permutation of arguments. */
/* Describe the part of ARGV that contains non-options that have
been skipped. `first_nonopt' is the index in ARGV of the first of them;
`last_nonopt' is the index after the last of them. */
static int first_nonopt;
static int last_nonopt;
/* Exchange two adjacent subsequences of ARGV.
One subsequence is elements [first_nonopt,last_nonopt)
which contains all the non-options that have been skipped so far.
The other is elements [last_nonopt,optind), which contains all
the options processed since those non-options were skipped.
`first_nonopt' and `last_nonopt' are relocated so that they describe
the new indices of the non-options in ARGV after they are moved. */
static void
exchange (argv)
char **argv;
{
int nonopts_size = (last_nonopt - first_nonopt) * sizeof (char *);
char **temp = (char **) __alloca (nonopts_size);
/* Interchange the two blocks of data in ARGV. */
my_bcopy ((char *) &argv[first_nonopt], (char *) temp, nonopts_size);
my_bcopy ((char *) &argv[last_nonopt], (char *) &argv[first_nonopt],
(optind - last_nonopt) * sizeof (char *));
my_bcopy ((char *) temp,
(char *) &argv[first_nonopt + optind - last_nonopt],
nonopts_size);
/* Update records for the slots the non-options now occupy. */
first_nonopt += (optind - last_nonopt);
last_nonopt = optind;
}
/* Scan elements of ARGV (whose length is ARGC) for option characters
given in OPTSTRING.
If an element of ARGV starts with '-', and is not exactly "-" or "--",
then it is an option element. The characters of this element
(aside from the initial '-') are option characters. If `getopt'
is called repeatedly, it returns successively each of the option characters
from each of the option elements.
If `getopt' finds another option character, it returns that character,
updating `optind' and `nextchar' so that the next call to `getopt' can
resume the scan with the following option character or ARGV-element.
If there are no more option characters, `getopt' returns `EOF'.
Then `optind' is the index in ARGV of the first ARGV-element
that is not an option. (The ARGV-elements have been permuted
so that those that are not options now come last.)
OPTSTRING is a string containing the legitimate option characters.
If an option character is seen that is not listed in OPTSTRING,
return '?' after printing an error message. If you set `opterr' to
zero, the error message is suppressed but we still return '?'.
If a char in OPTSTRING is followed by a colon, that means it wants an arg,
so the following text in the same ARGV-element, or the text of the following
ARGV-element, is returned in `optarg'. Two colons mean an option that
wants an optional arg; if there is text in the current ARGV-element,
it is returned in `optarg', otherwise `optarg' is set to zero.
If OPTSTRING starts with `-' or `+', it requests different methods of
handling the non-option ARGV-elements.
See the comments about RETURN_IN_ORDER and REQUIRE_ORDER, above.
Long-named options begin with `--' instead of `-'.
Their names may be abbreviated as long as the abbreviation is unique
or is an exact match for some defined option. If they have an
argument, it follows the option name in the same ARGV-element, separated
from the option name by a `=', or else the in next ARGV-element.
When `getopt' finds a long-named option, it returns 0 if that option's
`flag' field is nonzero, the value of the option's `val' field
if the `flag' field is zero.
The elements of ARGV aren't really const, because we permute them.
But we pretend they're const in the prototype to be compatible
with other systems.
LONGOPTS is a vector of `struct option' terminated by an
element containing a name which is zero.
LONGIND returns the index in LONGOPT of the long-named option found.
It is only valid when a long-named option has been found by the most
recent call.
If LONG_ONLY is nonzero, '-' as well as '--' can introduce
long-named options. */
int
_getopt_internal (argc, argv, optstring, longopts, longind, long_only)
int argc;
char *const *argv;
const char *optstring;
const struct option *longopts;
int *longind;
int long_only;
{
int option_index;
optarg = 0;
/* Initialize the internal data when the first call is made.
Start processing options with ARGV-element 1 (since ARGV-element 0
is the program name); the sequence of previously skipped
non-option ARGV-elements is empty. */
if (optind == 0)
{
first_nonopt = last_nonopt = optind = 1;
nextchar = NULL;
/* Determine how to handle the ordering of options and nonoptions. */
if (optstring[0] == '-')
{
ordering = RETURN_IN_ORDER;
++optstring;
}
else if (optstring[0] == '+')
{
ordering = REQUIRE_ORDER;
++optstring;
}
else if (getenv ("POSIXLY_CORRECT") != NULL)
ordering = REQUIRE_ORDER;
else
ordering = PERMUTE;
}
if (nextchar == NULL || *nextchar == '\0')
{
if (ordering == PERMUTE)
{
/* If we have just processed some options following some non-options,
exchange them so that the options come first. */
if (first_nonopt != last_nonopt && last_nonopt != optind)
exchange ((char **) argv);
else if (last_nonopt != optind)
first_nonopt = optind;
/* Now skip any additional non-options
and extend the range of non-options previously skipped. */
while (optind < argc
&& (argv[optind][0] != '-' || argv[optind][1] == '\0')
#ifdef GETOPT_COMPAT
&& (longopts == NULL
|| argv[optind][0] != '+' || argv[optind][1] == '\0')
#endif /* GETOPT_COMPAT */
)
optind++;
last_nonopt = optind;
}
/* Special ARGV-element `--' means premature end of options.
Skip it like a null option,
then exchange with previous non-options as if it were an option,
then skip everything else like a non-option. */
if (optind != argc && !strcmp (argv[optind], "--"))
{
optind++;
if (first_nonopt != last_nonopt && last_nonopt != optind)
exchange ((char **) argv);
else if (first_nonopt == last_nonopt)
first_nonopt = optind;
last_nonopt = argc;
optind = argc;
}
/* If we have done all the ARGV-elements, stop the scan
and back over any non-options that we skipped and permuted. */
if (optind == argc)
{
/* Set the next-arg-index to point at the non-options
that we previously skipped, so the caller will digest them. */
if (first_nonopt != last_nonopt)
optind = first_nonopt;
return EOF;
}
/* If we have come to a non-option and did not permute it,
either stop the scan or describe it to the caller and pass it by. */
if ((argv[optind][0] != '-' || argv[optind][1] == '\0')
#ifdef GETOPT_COMPAT
&& (longopts == NULL
|| argv[optind][0] != '+' || argv[optind][1] == '\0')
#endif /* GETOPT_COMPAT */
)
{
if (ordering == REQUIRE_ORDER)
return EOF;
optarg = argv[optind++];
return 1;
}
/* We have found another option-ARGV-element.
Start decoding its characters. */
nextchar = (argv[optind] + 1
+ (longopts != NULL && argv[optind][1] == '-'));
}
if (longopts != NULL
&& ((argv[optind][0] == '-'
&& (argv[optind][1] == '-' || long_only))
#ifdef GETOPT_COMPAT
|| argv[optind][0] == '+'
#endif /* GETOPT_COMPAT */
))
{
const struct option *p;
char *s = nextchar;
int exact = 0;
int ambig = 0;
const struct option *pfound = NULL;
int indfound;
while (*s && *s != '=')
s++;
/* Test all options for either exact match or abbreviated matches. */
for (p = longopts, option_index = 0; p->name;
p++, option_index++)
if (!strncmp (p->name, nextchar, s - nextchar))
{
if (s - nextchar == strlen (p->name))
{
/* Exact match found. */
pfound = p;
indfound = option_index;
exact = 1;
break;
}
else if (pfound == NULL)
{
/* First nonexact match found. */
pfound = p;
indfound = option_index;
}
else
/* Second nonexact match found. */
ambig = 1;
}
if (ambig && !exact)
{
if (opterr)
fprintf (stderr, "%s: option `%s' is ambiguous\n",
argv[0], argv[optind]);
nextchar += strlen (nextchar);
optind++;
return '?';
}
if (pfound != NULL)
{
option_index = indfound;
optind++;
if (*s)
{
/* Don't test has_arg with >, because some C compilers don't
allow it to be used on enums. */
if (pfound->has_arg)
optarg = s + 1;
else
{
if (opterr)
{
if (argv[optind - 1][1] == '-')
/* --option */
fprintf (stderr,
"%s: option `--%s' doesn't allow an argument\n",
argv[0], pfound->name);
else
/* +option or -option */
fprintf (stderr,
"%s: option `%c%s' doesn't allow an argument\n",
argv[0], argv[optind - 1][0], pfound->name);
}
nextchar += strlen (nextchar);
return '?';
}
}
else if (pfound->has_arg == 1)
{
if (optind < argc)
optarg = argv[optind++];
else
{
if (opterr)
fprintf (stderr, "%s: option `%s' requires an argument\n",
argv[0], argv[optind - 1]);
nextchar += strlen (nextchar);
return optstring[0] == ':' ? ':' : '?';
}
}
nextchar += strlen (nextchar);
if (longind != NULL)
*longind = option_index;
if (pfound->flag)
{
*(pfound->flag) = pfound->val;
return 0;
}
return pfound->val;
}
/* Can't find it as a long option. If this is not getopt_long_only,
or the option starts with '--' or is not a valid short
option, then it's an error.
Otherwise interpret it as a short option. */
if (!long_only || argv[optind][1] == '-'
#ifdef GETOPT_COMPAT
|| argv[optind][0] == '+'
#endif /* GETOPT_COMPAT */
|| my_index (optstring, *nextchar) == NULL)
{
if (opterr)
{
if (argv[optind][1] == '-')
/* --option */
fprintf (stderr, "%s: unrecognized option `--%s'\n",
argv[0], nextchar);
else
/* +option or -option */
fprintf (stderr, "%s: unrecognized option `%c%s'\n",
argv[0], argv[optind][0], nextchar);
}
nextchar = (char *) "";
optind++;
return '?';
}
}
/* Look at and handle the next option-character. */
{
char c = *nextchar++;
char *temp = my_index (optstring, c);
/* Increment `optind' when we start to process its last character. */
if (*nextchar == '\0')
++optind;
if (temp == NULL || c == ':')
{
if (opterr)
{
#if 0
if (c < 040 || c >= 0177)
fprintf (stderr, "%s: unrecognized option, character code 0%o\n",
argv[0], c);
else
fprintf (stderr, "%s: unrecognized option `-%c'\n", argv[0], c);
#else
/* 1003.2 specifies the format of this message. */
fprintf (stderr, "%s: illegal option -- %c\n", argv[0], c);
#endif
}
optopt = c;
return '?';
}
if (temp[1] == ':')
{
if (temp[2] == ':')
{
/* This is an option that accepts an argument optionally. */
if (*nextchar != '\0')
{
optarg = nextchar;
optind++;
}
else
optarg = 0;
nextchar = NULL;
}
else
{
/* This is an option that requires an argument. */
if (*nextchar != '\0')
{
optarg = nextchar;
/* If we end this ARGV-element by taking the rest as an arg,
we must advance to the next element now. */
optind++;
}
else if (optind == argc)
{
if (opterr)
{
#if 0
fprintf (stderr, "%s: option `-%c' requires an argument\n",
argv[0], c);
#else
/* 1003.2 specifies the format of this message. */
fprintf (stderr, "%s: option requires an argument -- %c\n",
argv[0], c);
#endif
}
optopt = c;
if (optstring[0] == ':')
c = ':';
else
c = '?';
}
else
/* We already incremented `optind' once;
increment it again when taking next ARGV-elt as argument. */
optarg = argv[optind++];
nextchar = NULL;
}
}
return c;
}
}
int
getopt (argc, argv, optstring)
int argc;
char *const *argv;
const char *optstring;
{
return _getopt_internal (argc, argv, optstring,
(const struct option *) 0,
(int *) 0,
0);
}
#endif /* _LIBC or not __GNU_LIBRARY__. */
#ifdef TEST
/* Compile with -DTEST to make an executable for use in testing
the above definition of `getopt'. */
int
main (argc, argv)
int argc;
char **argv;
{
int c;
int digit_optind = 0;
while (1)
{
int this_option_optind = optind ? optind : 1;
c = getopt (argc, argv, "abc:d:0123456789");
if (c == EOF)
break;
switch (c)
{
case '0':
case '1':
case '2':
case '3':
case '4':
case '5':
case '6':
case '7':
case '8':
case '9':
if (digit_optind != 0 && digit_optind != this_option_optind)
printf ("digits occur in two different argv-elements.\n");
digit_optind = this_option_optind;
printf ("option %c\n", c);
break;
case 'a':
printf ("option a\n");
break;
case 'b':
printf ("option b\n");
break;
case 'c':
printf ("option c with value `%s'\n", optarg);
break;
case '?':
break;
default:
printf ("?? getopt returned character code 0%o ??\n", c);
}
}
if (optind < argc)
{
printf ("non-option ARGV-elements: ");
while (optind < argc)
printf ("%s ", argv[optind++]);
printf ("\n");
}
exit (0);
}
#endif /* TEST */
lib/doc-support/getopt.h
+129
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
/* Declarations for getopt.
Copyright (C) 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the
Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any
later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
#ifndef _GETOPT_H
#define _GETOPT_H 1
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif
/* For communication from `getopt' to the caller.
When `getopt' finds an option that takes an argument,
the argument value is returned here.
Also, when `ordering' is RETURN_IN_ORDER,
each non-option ARGV-element is returned here. */
extern char *optarg;
/* Index in ARGV of the next element to be scanned.
This is used for communication to and from the caller
and for communication between successive calls to `getopt'.
On entry to `getopt', zero means this is the first call; initialize.
When `getopt' returns EOF, this is the index of the first of the
non-option elements that the caller should itself scan.
Otherwise, `optind' communicates from one call to the next
how much of ARGV has been scanned so far. */
extern int optind;
/* Callers store zero here to inhibit the error message `getopt' prints
for unrecognized options. */
extern int opterr;
/* Set to an option character which was unrecognized. */
extern int optopt;
/* Describe the long-named options requested by the application.
The LONG_OPTIONS argument to getopt_long or getopt_long_only is a vector
of `struct option' terminated by an element containing a name which is
zero.
The field `has_arg' is:
no_argument (or 0) if the option does not take an argument,
required_argument (or 1) if the option requires an argument,
optional_argument (or 2) if the option takes an optional argument.
If the field `flag' is not NULL, it points to a variable that is set
to the value given in the field `val' when the option is found, but
left unchanged if the option is not found.
To have a long-named option do something other than set an `int' to
a compiled-in constant, such as set a value from `optarg', set the
option's `flag' field to zero and its `val' field to a nonzero
value (the equivalent single-letter option character, if there is
one). For long options that have a zero `flag' field, `getopt'
returns the contents of the `val' field. */
struct option
{
#if __STDC__
const char *name;
#else
char *name;
#endif
/* has_arg can't be an enum because some compilers complain about
type mismatches in all the code that assumes it is an int. */
int has_arg;
int *flag;
int val;
};
/* Names for the values of the `has_arg' field of `struct option'. */
#define no_argument 0
#define required_argument 1
#define optional_argument 2
#if __STDC__
#if defined(__GNU_LIBRARY__)
/* Many other libraries have conflicting prototypes for getopt, with
differences in the consts, in stdlib.h. To avoid compilation
errors, only prototype getopt for the GNU C library. */
extern int getopt (int argc, char *const *argv, const char *shortopts);
#else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */
extern int getopt ();
#endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */
extern int getopt_long (int argc, char *const *argv, const char *shortopts,
const struct option *longopts, int *longind);
extern int getopt_long_only (int argc, char *const *argv,
const char *shortopts,
const struct option *longopts, int *longind);
/* Internal only. Users should not call this directly. */
extern int _getopt_internal (int argc, char *const *argv,
const char *shortopts,
const struct option *longopts, int *longind,
int long_only);
#else /* not __STDC__ */
extern int getopt ();
extern int getopt_long ();
extern int getopt_long_only ();
extern int _getopt_internal ();
#endif /* not __STDC__ */
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif
#endif /* _GETOPT_H */
lib/doc-support/getopt1.c
+176
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
/* getopt_long and getopt_long_only entry points for GNU getopt.
Copyright (C) 1987, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 1993
Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the
Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any
later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include "config.h"
#endif
#include "getopt.h"
#if !__STDC__ && !defined(const) && IN_GCC
#define const
#endif
#include <stdio.h>
/* Comment out all this code if we are using the GNU C Library, and are not
actually compiling the library itself. This code is part of the GNU C
Library, but also included in many other GNU distributions. Compiling
and linking in this code is a waste when using the GNU C library
(especially if it is a shared library). Rather than having every GNU
program understand `configure --with-gnu-libc' and omit the object files,
it is simpler to just do this in the source for each such file. */
#if defined (_LIBC) || !defined (__GNU_LIBRARY__)
/* This needs to come after some library #include
to get __GNU_LIBRARY__ defined. */
#ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__
#include <stdlib.h>
#else
char *getenv ();
#endif
#ifndef NULL
#define NULL 0
#endif
int
getopt_long (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index)
int argc;
char *const *argv;
const char *options;
const struct option *long_options;
int *opt_index;
{
return _getopt_internal (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index, 0);
}
/* Like getopt_long, but '-' as well as '--' can indicate a long option.
If an option that starts with '-' (not '--') doesn't match a long option,
but does match a short option, it is parsed as a short option
instead. */
int
getopt_long_only (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index)
int argc;
char *const *argv;
const char *options;
const struct option *long_options;
int *opt_index;
{
return _getopt_internal (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index, 1);
}
#endif /* _LIBC or not __GNU_LIBRARY__. */
#ifdef TEST
#include <stdio.h>
int
main (argc, argv)
int argc;
char **argv;
{
int c;
int digit_optind = 0;
while (1)
{
int this_option_optind = optind ? optind : 1;
int option_index = 0;
static struct option long_options[] =
{
{"add", 1, 0, 0},
{"append", 0, 0, 0},
{"delete", 1, 0, 0},
{"verbose", 0, 0, 0},
{"create", 0, 0, 0},
{"file", 1, 0, 0},
{0, 0, 0, 0}
};
c = getopt_long (argc, argv, "abc:d:0123456789",
long_options, &option_index);
if (c == EOF)
break;
switch (c)
{
case 0:
printf ("option %s", long_options[option_index].name);
if (optarg)
printf (" with arg %s", optarg);
printf ("\n");
break;
case '0':
case '1':
case '2':
case '3':
case '4':
case '5':
case '6':
case '7':
case '8':
case '9':
if (digit_optind != 0 && digit_optind != this_option_optind)
printf ("digits occur in two different argv-elements.\n");
digit_optind = this_option_optind;
printf ("option %c\n", c);
break;
case 'a':
printf ("option a\n");
break;
case 'b':
printf ("option b\n");
break;
case 'c':
printf ("option c with value `%s'\n", optarg);
break;
case 'd':
printf ("option d with value `%s'\n", optarg);
break;
case '?':
break;
default:
printf ("?? getopt returned character code 0%o ??\n", c);
}
}
if (optind < argc)
{
printf ("non-option ARGV-elements: ");
while (optind < argc)
printf ("%s ", argv[optind++]);
printf ("\n");
}
exit (0);
}
#endif /* TEST */
lib/doc-support/texindex.c
+1666
View File
File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff
lib/glob/ChangeLog
+13
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
Thu Oct 29 08:58:12 1992 Brian Fox (bfox@cubit)
* glob.c (glob_filename): Fix tiny memory leak. Rework some
comments.
Mon Jul 20 10:57:36 1992 Brian Fox (bfox@cubit)
* glob.c: (glob_filename) Change use of rindex () to strrchr ().
Thu Jul 9 10:02:47 1992 Brian Fox (bfox@cubit)
* fnmatch.c: (fnmatch) Only process `[' as the start of a bracket
expression if there is a closing `]' present in the string.
lib/intl/ChangeLog
+4
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
2003-05-22 GNU <bug-gnu-gettext@gnu.org>
* Version 0.12.1 released.
lib/intl/Makefile.in
+463
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,463 @@
# Makefile for directory with message catalog handling library of GNU gettext
# Copyright (C) 1995-1998, 2000-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
#
# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
# under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
# by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
# any later version.
#
# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
# Library General Public License for more details.
#
# You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
# License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
# USA.
PACKAGE = @PACKAGE_NAME@
VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@
SHELL = /bin/sh
srcdir = @srcdir@
top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@
top_builddir = @BUILD_DIR@
VPATH = $(srcdir)
prefix = @prefix@
exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@
transform = @program_transform_name@
libdir = @libdir@
includedir = @includedir@
datadir = @datadir@
localedir = $(datadir)/locale
gettextsrcdir = $(datadir)/gettext/intl
aliaspath = $(localedir)
subdir = intl
INSTALL = @INSTALL@
INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@
MKINSTALLDIRS = @MKINSTALLDIRS@
mkinstalldirs = $(SHELL) $(MKINSTALLDIRS)
l = @INTL_LIBTOOL_SUFFIX_PREFIX@
AR = ar
CC = @CC@
LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@
RANLIB = @RANLIB@
YACC = @INTLBISON@ -y -d
YFLAGS = --name-prefix=__gettext
DEFS = -DLOCALEDIR=\"$(localedir)\" -DLOCALE_ALIAS_PATH=\"$(aliaspath)\" \
-DLIBDIR=\"$(prefix)/libdata\" -DIN_LIBINTL \
-DENABLE_RELOCATABLE=1 -DIN_LIBRARY -DINSTALLDIR=\"$(libdir)\" -DNO_XMALLOC \
-Dset_relocation_prefix=libintl_set_relocation_prefix \
-Drelocate=libintl_relocate \
-DDEPENDS_ON_LIBICONV=1 @DEFS@
CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@
CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@
LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@
LIBS = @LIBS@
COMPILE = $(CC) -c $(DEFS) $(INCLUDES) $(CPPFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) $(XCFLAGS)
HEADERS = \
gmo.h \
gettextP.h \
hash-string.h \
loadinfo.h \
plural-exp.h \
eval-plural.h \
localcharset.h \
relocatable.h \
os2compat.h \
libgnuintl.h.in
SOURCES = \
bindtextdom.c \
dcgettext.c \
dgettext.c \
gettext.c \
finddomain.c \
loadmsgcat.c \
localealias.c \
textdomain.c \
l10nflist.c \
explodename.c \
dcigettext.c \
dcngettext.c \
dngettext.c \
ngettext.c \
plural.y \
plural-exp.c \
localcharset.c \
relocatable.c \
localename.c \
log.c \
osdep.c \
os2compat.c \
intl-compat.c
OBJECTS = \
bindtextdom.$lo \
dcgettext.$lo \
dgettext.$lo \
gettext.$lo \
finddomain.$lo \
loadmsgcat.$lo \
localealias.$lo \
textdomain.$lo \
l10nflist.$lo \
explodename.$lo \
dcigettext.$lo \
dcngettext.$lo \
dngettext.$lo \
ngettext.$lo \
plural.$lo \
plural-exp.$lo \
localcharset.$lo \
relocatable.$lo \
localename.$lo \
log.$lo \
osdep.$lo \
intl-compat.$lo
DISTFILES.common = Makefile.in \
config.charset locale.alias ref-add.sin ref-del.sin $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES)
DISTFILES.generated = plural.c
DISTFILES.normal = VERSION
DISTFILES.gettext = COPYING.LIB-2.0 COPYING.LIB-2.1 libintl.glibc \
Makefile.vms libgnuintl.h.msvc-shared README.woe32 Makefile.msvc
DISTFILES.obsolete = xopen-msg.sed linux-msg.sed po2tbl.sed.in cat-compat.c \
COPYING.LIB-2 gettext.h libgettext.h plural-eval.c libgnuintl.h
all: all-@USE_INCLUDED_LIBINTL@
all-yes: libintl.$la libintl.h charset.alias ref-add.sed ref-del.sed
all-no: all-no-@BUILD_INCLUDED_LIBINTL@
all-no-yes: libgnuintl.$la
all-no-no:
libintl.a libgnuintl.a: $(OBJECTS)
rm -f $@
$(AR) cru $@ $(OBJECTS)
$(RANLIB) $@
libintl.la libgnuintl.la: $(OBJECTS)
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=link \
$(CC) $(CPPFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) $(XCFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS) -o $@ \
$(OBJECTS) @LTLIBICONV@ $(LIBS) \
-version-info $(LTV_CURRENT):$(LTV_REVISION):$(LTV_AGE) \
-rpath $(libdir) \
-no-undefined
# Libtool's library version information for libintl.
# Before making a gettext release, the gettext maintainer must change this
# according to the libtool documentation, section "Library interface versions".
# Maintainers of other packages that include the intl directory must *not*
# change these values.
LTV_CURRENT=5
LTV_REVISION=0
LTV_AGE=3
.SUFFIXES:
.SUFFIXES: .c .y .o .lo .sin .sed
.c.o:
$(COMPILE) $<
.y.c:
$(YACC) $(YFLAGS) --output $@ $<
rm -f $*.h
bindtextdom.lo: $(srcdir)/bindtextdom.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/bindtextdom.c
dcgettext.lo: $(srcdir)/dcgettext.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/dcgettext.c
dgettext.lo: $(srcdir)/dgettext.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/dgettext.c
gettext.lo: $(srcdir)/gettext.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/gettext.c
finddomain.lo: $(srcdir)/finddomain.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/finddomain.c
loadmsgcat.lo: $(srcdir)/loadmsgcat.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/loadmsgcat.c
localealias.lo: $(srcdir)/localealias.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/localealias.c
textdomain.lo: $(srcdir)/textdomain.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/textdomain.c
l10nflist.lo: $(srcdir)/l10nflist.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/l10nflist.c
explodename.lo: $(srcdir)/explodename.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/explodename.c
dcigettext.lo: $(srcdir)/dcigettext.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/dcigettext.c
dcngettext.lo: $(srcdir)/dcngettext.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/dcngettext.c
dngettext.lo: $(srcdir)/dngettext.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/dngettext.c
ngettext.lo: $(srcdir)/ngettext.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/ngettext.c
plural.lo: $(srcdir)/plural.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/plural.c
plural-exp.lo: $(srcdir)/plural-exp.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/plural-exp.c
localcharset.lo: $(srcdir)/localcharset.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/localcharset.c
relocatable.lo: $(srcdir)/relocatable.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/relocatable.c
localename.lo: $(srcdir)/localename.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/localename.c
log.lo: $(srcdir)/log.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/log.c
osdep.lo: $(srcdir)/osdep.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/osdep.c
intl-compat.lo: $(srcdir)/intl-compat.c
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=compile $(COMPILE) $(srcdir)/intl-compat.c
ref-add.sed: $(srcdir)/ref-add.sin
sed -e '/^#/d' -e 's/@''PACKAGE''@/@PACKAGE@/g' $(srcdir)/ref-add.sin > t-ref-add.sed
mv t-ref-add.sed ref-add.sed
ref-del.sed: $(srcdir)/ref-del.sin
sed -e '/^#/d' -e 's/@''PACKAGE''@/@PACKAGE@/g' $(srcdir)/ref-del.sin > t-ref-del.sed
mv t-ref-del.sed ref-del.sed
INCLUDES = -I. -I$(srcdir) -I${top_builddir} -I${top_srcdir}
libgnuintl.h: $(srcdir)/libgnuintl.h.in
cp $(srcdir)/libgnuintl.h.in libgnuintl.h
libintl.h: libgnuintl.h
cp libgnuintl.h libintl.h
charset.alias: $(srcdir)/config.charset
$(SHELL) $(srcdir)/config.charset '@host@' > t-$@
mv t-$@ $@
check: all
# We must not install the libintl.h/libintl.a files if we are on a
# system which has the GNU gettext() function in its C library or in a
# separate library.
# If you want to use the one which comes with this version of the
# package, you have to use `configure --with-included-gettext'.
install: install-exec install-data
install-exec: all
if { test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-runtime" || test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-tools"; } \
&& test '@USE_INCLUDED_LIBINTL@' = yes; then \
$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) $(DESTDIR)$(includedir); \
$(INSTALL_DATA) libintl.h $(DESTDIR)$(includedir)/libintl.h; \
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=install \
$(INSTALL_DATA) libintl.$la $(DESTDIR)$(libdir)/libintl.$la; \
if test "@RELOCATABLE@" = yes; then \
dependencies=`sed -n -e 's,^dependency_libs=\(.*\),\1,p' < $(DESTDIR)$(libdir)/libintl.la | sed -e "s,^',," -e "s,'\$$,,"`; \
if test -n "$dependencies"; then \
rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(libdir)/libintl.la; \
fi; \
fi; \
else \
: ; \
fi
if test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-tools" \
&& test '@USE_INCLUDED_LIBINTL@' = no; then \
$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir); \
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=install \
$(INSTALL_DATA) libgnuintl.$la $(DESTDIR)$(libdir)/libgnuintl.$la; \
rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(libdir)/preloadable_libintl.so; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir)/libgnuintl.so $(DESTDIR)$(libdir)/preloadable_libintl.so; \
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=uninstall \
rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(libdir)/libgnuintl.$la; \
else \
: ; \
fi
if test '@USE_INCLUDED_LIBINTL@' = yes; then \
$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(localedir); \
test -f $(DESTDIR)$(localedir)/locale.alias \
&& orig=$(DESTDIR)$(localedir)/locale.alias \
|| orig=$(srcdir)/locale.alias; \
temp=$(DESTDIR)$(localedir)/t-locale.alias; \
dest=$(DESTDIR)$(localedir)/locale.alias; \
sed -f ref-add.sed $$orig > $$temp; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$temp $$dest; \
rm -f $$temp; \
else \
: ; \
fi
install-data: all
if test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-tools"; then \
$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(gettextsrcdir); \
$(INSTALL_DATA) VERSION $(DESTDIR)$(gettextsrcdir)/VERSION; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) ChangeLog.inst $(DESTDIR)$(gettextsrcdir)/ChangeLog; \
dists="COPYING.LIB-2.0 COPYING.LIB-2.1 $(DISTFILES.common)"; \
for file in $$dists; do \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/$$file \
$(DESTDIR)$(gettextsrcdir)/$$file; \
done; \
chmod a+x $(DESTDIR)$(gettextsrcdir)/config.charset; \
dists="$(DISTFILES.generated)"; \
for file in $$dists; do \
if test -f $$file; then dir=.; else dir=$(srcdir); fi; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$dir/$$file \
$(DESTDIR)$(gettextsrcdir)/$$file; \
done; \
dists="$(DISTFILES.obsolete)"; \
for file in $$dists; do \
rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(gettextsrcdir)/$$file; \
done; \
else \
: ; \
fi
install-strip: install
installdirs:
if { test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-runtime" || test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-tools"; } \
&& test '@USE_INCLUDED_LIBINTL@' = yes; then \
$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) $(DESTDIR)$(includedir); \
else \
: ; \
fi
if test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-tools" \
&& test '@USE_INCLUDED_LIBINTL@' = no; then \
$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir); \
else \
: ; \
fi
if test '@USE_INCLUDED_LIBINTL@' = yes; then \
test @GLIBC21@ != no || $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir); \
$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(localedir); \
else \
: ; \
fi
if test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-tools"; then \
$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(gettextsrcdir); \
else \
: ; \
fi
# Define this as empty until I found a useful application.
installcheck:
uninstall:
if { test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-runtime" || test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-tools"; } \
&& test '@USE_INCLUDED_LIBINTL@' = yes; then \
rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(includedir)/libintl.h; \
$(LIBTOOL) --mode=uninstall \
rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(libdir)/libintl.$la; \
else \
: ; \
fi
if test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-tools" \
&& test '@USE_INCLUDED_LIBINTL@' = no; then \
rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(libdir)/preloadable_libintl.so; \
else \
: ; \
fi
if test '@USE_INCLUDED_LIBINTL@' = yes; then \
if test -f $(DESTDIR)$(prefix)/libdata/charset.alias; then \
temp=$(DESTDIR)$(prefix)/libdata/t-charset.alias; \
dest=$(DESTDIR)$(prefix)/libdata/charset.alias; \
sed -f ref-del.sed $$dest > $$temp; \
if grep '^# Packages using this file: $$' $$temp > /dev/null; then \
rm -f $$dest; \
else \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$temp $$dest; \
fi; \
rm -f $$temp; \
fi; \
if test -f $(DESTDIR)$(localedir)/locale.alias; then \
temp=$(DESTDIR)$(localedir)/t-locale.alias; \
dest=$(DESTDIR)$(localedir)/locale.alias; \
sed -f ref-del.sed $$dest > $$temp; \
if grep '^# Packages using this file: $$' $$temp > /dev/null; then \
rm -f $$dest; \
else \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$temp $$dest; \
fi; \
rm -f $$temp; \
fi; \
else \
: ; \
fi
if test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-tools"; then \
for file in VERSION ChangeLog COPYING.LIB-2.0 COPYING.LIB-2.1 $(DISTFILES.common) $(DISTFILES.generated); do \
rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(gettextsrcdir)/$$file; \
done; \
else \
: ; \
fi
info dvi ps pdf html:
$(OBJECTS): ${top_builddir}/config.h libgnuintl.h
bindtextdom.$lo dcgettext.$lo dcigettext.$lo dcngettext.$lo dgettext.$lo dngettext.$lo finddomain.$lo gettext.$lo intl-compat.$lo loadmsgcat.$lo localealias.$lo ngettext.$lo textdomain.$lo: $(srcdir)/gettextP.h $(srcdir)/gmo.h $(srcdir)/loadinfo.h
dcigettext.$lo loadmsgcat.$lo: $(srcdir)/hash-string.h
explodename.$lo l10nflist.$lo: $(srcdir)/loadinfo.h
dcigettext.$lo loadmsgcat.$lo plural.$lo plural-exp.$lo: $(srcdir)/plural-exp.h
dcigettext.$lo: $(srcdir)/eval-plural.h
localcharset.$lo: $(srcdir)/localcharset.h
localealias.$lo localcharset.$lo relocatable.$lo: $(srcdir)/relocatable.h
tags: TAGS
TAGS: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES)
here=`pwd`; cd $(srcdir) && etags -o $$here/TAGS $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES)
ctags: CTAGS
CTAGS: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES)
here=`pwd`; cd $(srcdir) && ctags -o $$here/CTAGS $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES)
id: ID
ID: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES)
here=`pwd`; cd $(srcdir) && mkid -f$$here/ID $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES)
mostlyclean:
rm -f *.a *.la *.o *.obj *.lo core core.*
rm -f libgnuintl.h libintl.h charset.alias ref-add.sed ref-del.sed
rm -f -r .libs _libs
clean: mostlyclean
distclean: clean
rm -f Makefile ID TAGS
if test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-runtime" || test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-tools"; then \
rm -f ChangeLog.inst $(DISTFILES.normal); \
else \
: ; \
fi
maintainer-clean: distclean
@echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use;"
@echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild."
# GNU gettext needs not contain the file `VERSION' but contains some
# other files which should not be distributed in other packages.
distdir = ../$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)/$(subdir)
dist distdir: Makefile
if test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-tools"; then \
: ; \
else \
if test "$(PACKAGE)" = "gettext-runtime"; then \
additional="$(DISTFILES.gettext)"; \
else \
additional="$(DISTFILES.normal)"; \
fi; \
$(MAKE) $(DISTFILES.common) $(DISTFILES.generated) $$additional; \
for file in ChangeLog $(DISTFILES.common) $(DISTFILES.generated) $$additional; do \
if test -f $$file; then dir=.; else dir=$(srcdir); fi; \
cp -p $$dir/$$file $(distdir); \
done; \
fi
Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status
cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status
# This would be more efficient, but doesn't work any more with autoconf-2.57,
# when AC_CONFIG_FILES([intl/Makefile:somedir/Makefile.in]) is used.
# cd $(top_builddir) && CONFIG_FILES=$(subdir)/$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= $(SHELL) ./config.status
# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make not to export all variables.
# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded.
.NOEXPORT:
lib/intl/VERSION
+1
View File
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
GNU gettext library from gettext-0.12.1
lib/intl/bindtextdom.c
+374
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,374 @@
/* Implementation of the bindtextdomain(3) function
Copyright (C) 1995-1998, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <stddef.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#ifdef _LIBC
# include <libintl.h>
#else
# include "libgnuintl.h"
#endif
#include "gettextP.h"
#ifdef _LIBC
/* We have to handle multi-threaded applications. */
# include <bits/libc-lock.h>
#else
/* Provide dummy implementation if this is outside glibc. */
# define __libc_rwlock_define(CLASS, NAME)
# define __libc_rwlock_wrlock(NAME)
# define __libc_rwlock_unlock(NAME)
#endif
/* The internal variables in the standalone libintl.a must have different
names than the internal variables in GNU libc, otherwise programs
using libintl.a cannot be linked statically. */
#if !defined _LIBC
# define _nl_default_dirname libintl_nl_default_dirname
# define _nl_domain_bindings libintl_nl_domain_bindings
#endif
/* Some compilers, like SunOS4 cc, don't have offsetof in <stddef.h>. */
#ifndef offsetof
# define offsetof(type,ident) ((size_t)&(((type*)0)->ident))
#endif
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
/* Contains the default location of the message catalogs. */
extern const char _nl_default_dirname[];
#ifdef _LIBC
extern const char _nl_default_dirname_internal[] attribute_hidden;
#else
# define INTUSE(name) name
#endif
/* List with bindings of specific domains. */
extern struct binding *_nl_domain_bindings;
/* Lock variable to protect the global data in the gettext implementation. */
__libc_rwlock_define (extern, _nl_state_lock attribute_hidden)
/* Names for the libintl functions are a problem. They must not clash
with existing names and they should follow ANSI C. But this source
code is also used in GNU C Library where the names have a __
prefix. So we have to make a difference here. */
#ifdef _LIBC
# define BINDTEXTDOMAIN __bindtextdomain
# define BIND_TEXTDOMAIN_CODESET __bind_textdomain_codeset
# ifndef strdup
# define strdup(str) __strdup (str)
# endif
#else
# define BINDTEXTDOMAIN libintl_bindtextdomain
# define BIND_TEXTDOMAIN_CODESET libintl_bind_textdomain_codeset
#endif
/* Prototypes for local functions. */
static void set_binding_values PARAMS ((const char *domainname,
const char **dirnamep,
const char **codesetp));
/* Specifies the directory name *DIRNAMEP and the output codeset *CODESETP
to be used for the DOMAINNAME message catalog.
If *DIRNAMEP or *CODESETP is NULL, the corresponding attribute is not
modified, only the current value is returned.
If DIRNAMEP or CODESETP is NULL, the corresponding attribute is neither
modified nor returned. */
static void
set_binding_values (domainname, dirnamep, codesetp)
const char *domainname;
const char **dirnamep;
const char **codesetp;
{
struct binding *binding;
int modified;
/* Some sanity checks. */
if (domainname == NULL || domainname[0] == '\0')
{
if (dirnamep)
*dirnamep = NULL;
if (codesetp)
*codesetp = NULL;
return;
}
__libc_rwlock_wrlock (_nl_state_lock);
modified = 0;
for (binding = _nl_domain_bindings; binding != NULL; binding = binding->next)
{
int compare = strcmp (domainname, binding->domainname);
if (compare == 0)
/* We found it! */
break;
if (compare < 0)
{
/* It is not in the list. */
binding = NULL;
break;
}
}
if (binding != NULL)
{
if (dirnamep)
{
const char *dirname = *dirnamep;
if (dirname == NULL)
/* The current binding has be to returned. */
*dirnamep = binding->dirname;
else
{
/* The domain is already bound. If the new value and the old
one are equal we simply do nothing. Otherwise replace the
old binding. */
char *result = binding->dirname;
if (strcmp (dirname, result) != 0)
{
if (strcmp (dirname, INTUSE(_nl_default_dirname)) == 0)
result = (char *) INTUSE(_nl_default_dirname);
else
{
#if defined _LIBC || defined HAVE_STRDUP
result = strdup (dirname);
#else
size_t len = strlen (dirname) + 1;
result = (char *) malloc (len);
if (__builtin_expect (result != NULL, 1))
memcpy (result, dirname, len);
#endif
}
if (__builtin_expect (result != NULL, 1))
{
if (binding->dirname != INTUSE(_nl_default_dirname))
free (binding->dirname);
binding->dirname = result;
modified = 1;
}
}
*dirnamep = result;
}
}
if (codesetp)
{
const char *codeset = *codesetp;
if (codeset == NULL)
/* The current binding has be to returned. */
*codesetp = binding->codeset;
else
{
/* The domain is already bound. If the new value and the old
one are equal we simply do nothing. Otherwise replace the
old binding. */
char *result = binding->codeset;
if (result == NULL || strcmp (codeset, result) != 0)
{
#if defined _LIBC || defined HAVE_STRDUP
result = strdup (codeset);
#else
size_t len = strlen (codeset) + 1;
result = (char *) malloc (len);
if (__builtin_expect (result != NULL, 1))
memcpy (result, codeset, len);
#endif
if (__builtin_expect (result != NULL, 1))
{
if (binding->codeset != NULL)
free (binding->codeset);
binding->codeset = result;
binding->codeset_cntr++;
modified = 1;
}
}
*codesetp = result;
}
}
}
else if ((dirnamep == NULL || *dirnamep == NULL)
&& (codesetp == NULL || *codesetp == NULL))
{
/* Simply return the default values. */
if (dirnamep)
*dirnamep = INTUSE(_nl_default_dirname);
if (codesetp)
*codesetp = NULL;
}
else
{
/* We have to create a new binding. */
size_t len = strlen (domainname) + 1;
struct binding *new_binding =
(struct binding *) malloc (offsetof (struct binding, domainname) + len);
if (__builtin_expect (new_binding == NULL, 0))
goto failed;
memcpy (new_binding->domainname, domainname, len);
if (dirnamep)
{
const char *dirname = *dirnamep;
if (dirname == NULL)
/* The default value. */
dirname = INTUSE(_nl_default_dirname);
else
{
if (strcmp (dirname, INTUSE(_nl_default_dirname)) == 0)
dirname = INTUSE(_nl_default_dirname);
else
{
char *result;
#if defined _LIBC || defined HAVE_STRDUP
result = strdup (dirname);
if (__builtin_expect (result == NULL, 0))
goto failed_dirname;
#else
size_t len = strlen (dirname) + 1;
result = (char *) malloc (len);
if (__builtin_expect (result == NULL, 0))
goto failed_dirname;
memcpy (result, dirname, len);
#endif
dirname = result;
}
}
*dirnamep = dirname;
new_binding->dirname = (char *) dirname;
}
else
/* The default value. */
new_binding->dirname = (char *) INTUSE(_nl_default_dirname);
new_binding->codeset_cntr = 0;
if (codesetp)
{
const char *codeset = *codesetp;
if (codeset != NULL)
{
char *result;
#if defined _LIBC || defined HAVE_STRDUP
result = strdup (codeset);
if (__builtin_expect (result == NULL, 0))
goto failed_codeset;
#else
size_t len = strlen (codeset) + 1;
result = (char *) malloc (len);
if (__builtin_expect (result == NULL, 0))
goto failed_codeset;
memcpy (result, codeset, len);
#endif
codeset = result;
new_binding->codeset_cntr++;
}
*codesetp = codeset;
new_binding->codeset = (char *) codeset;
}
else
new_binding->codeset = NULL;
/* Now enqueue it. */
if (_nl_domain_bindings == NULL
|| strcmp (domainname, _nl_domain_bindings->domainname) < 0)
{
new_binding->next = _nl_domain_bindings;
_nl_domain_bindings = new_binding;
}
else
{
binding = _nl_domain_bindings;
while (binding->next != NULL
&& strcmp (domainname, binding->next->domainname) > 0)
binding = binding->next;
new_binding->next = binding->next;
binding->next = new_binding;
}
modified = 1;
/* Here we deal with memory allocation failures. */
if (0)
{
failed_codeset:
if (new_binding->dirname != INTUSE(_nl_default_dirname))
free (new_binding->dirname);
failed_dirname:
free (new_binding);
failed:
if (dirnamep)
*dirnamep = NULL;
if (codesetp)
*codesetp = NULL;
}
}
/* If we modified any binding, we flush the caches. */
if (modified)
++_nl_msg_cat_cntr;
__libc_rwlock_unlock (_nl_state_lock);
}
/* Specify that the DOMAINNAME message catalog will be found
in DIRNAME rather than in the system locale data base. */
char *
BINDTEXTDOMAIN (domainname, dirname)
const char *domainname;
const char *dirname;
{
set_binding_values (domainname, &dirname, NULL);
return (char *) dirname;
}
/* Specify the character encoding in which the messages from the
DOMAINNAME message catalog will be returned. */
char *
BIND_TEXTDOMAIN_CODESET (domainname, codeset)
const char *domainname;
const char *codeset;
{
set_binding_values (domainname, NULL, &codeset);
return (char *) codeset;
}
#ifdef _LIBC
/* Aliases for function names in GNU C Library. */
weak_alias (__bindtextdomain, bindtextdomain);
weak_alias (__bind_textdomain_codeset, bind_textdomain_codeset);
#endif
lib/intl/config.charset
Executable
+467
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,467 @@
#! /bin/sh
# Output a system dependent table of character encoding aliases.
#
# Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
#
# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
# under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
# by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
# any later version.
#
# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
# Library General Public License for more details.
#
# You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
# License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
# USA.
#
# The table consists of lines of the form
# ALIAS CANONICAL
#
# ALIAS is the (system dependent) result of "nl_langinfo (CODESET)".
# ALIAS is compared in a case sensitive way.
#
# CANONICAL is the GNU canonical name for this character encoding.
# It must be an encoding supported by libiconv. Support by GNU libc is
# also desirable. CANONICAL is case insensitive. Usually an upper case
# MIME charset name is preferred.
# The current list of GNU canonical charset names is as follows.
#
# name used by which systems a MIME name?
# ASCII, ANSI_X3.4-1968 glibc solaris freebsd
# ISO-8859-1 glibc aix hpux irix osf solaris freebsd yes
# ISO-8859-2 glibc aix hpux irix osf solaris freebsd yes
# ISO-8859-3 glibc solaris yes
# ISO-8859-4 osf solaris freebsd yes
# ISO-8859-5 glibc aix hpux irix osf solaris freebsd yes
# ISO-8859-6 glibc aix hpux solaris yes
# ISO-8859-7 glibc aix hpux irix osf solaris yes
# ISO-8859-8 glibc aix hpux osf solaris yes
# ISO-8859-9 glibc aix hpux irix osf solaris yes
# ISO-8859-13 glibc
# ISO-8859-14 glibc
# ISO-8859-15 glibc aix osf solaris freebsd
# KOI8-R glibc solaris freebsd yes
# KOI8-U glibc freebsd yes
# KOI8-T glibc
# CP437 dos
# CP775 dos
# CP850 aix osf dos
# CP852 dos
# CP855 dos
# CP856 aix
# CP857 dos
# CP861 dos
# CP862 dos
# CP864 dos
# CP865 dos
# CP866 freebsd dos
# CP869 dos
# CP874 woe32 dos
# CP922 aix
# CP932 aix woe32 dos
# CP943 aix
# CP949 osf woe32 dos
# CP950 woe32 dos
# CP1046 aix
# CP1124 aix
# CP1125 dos
# CP1129 aix
# CP1250 woe32
# CP1251 glibc solaris woe32
# CP1252 aix woe32
# CP1253 woe32
# CP1254 woe32
# CP1255 glibc woe32
# CP1256 woe32
# CP1257 woe32
# GB2312 glibc aix hpux irix solaris freebsd yes
# EUC-JP glibc aix hpux irix osf solaris freebsd yes
# EUC-KR glibc aix hpux irix osf solaris freebsd yes
# EUC-TW glibc aix hpux irix osf solaris
# BIG5 glibc aix hpux osf solaris freebsd yes
# BIG5-HKSCS glibc solaris
# GBK glibc aix osf solaris woe32 dos
# GB18030 glibc solaris
# SHIFT_JIS hpux osf solaris freebsd yes
# JOHAB glibc solaris woe32
# TIS-620 glibc aix hpux osf solaris
# VISCII glibc yes
# TCVN5712-1 glibc
# GEORGIAN-PS glibc
# HP-ROMAN8 hpux
# HP-ARABIC8 hpux
# HP-GREEK8 hpux
# HP-HEBREW8 hpux
# HP-TURKISH8 hpux
# HP-KANA8 hpux
# DEC-KANJI osf
# DEC-HANYU osf
# UTF-8 glibc aix hpux osf solaris yes
#
# Note: Names which are not marked as being a MIME name should not be used in
# Internet protocols for information interchange (mail, news, etc.).
#
# Note: ASCII and ANSI_X3.4-1968 are synonymous canonical names. Applications
# must understand both names and treat them as equivalent.
#
# The first argument passed to this file is the canonical host specification,
# CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-OPERATING_SYSTEM
# or
# CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-KERNEL-OPERATING_SYSTEM
host="$1"
os=`echo "$host" | sed -e 's/^[^-]*-[^-]*-\(.*\)$/\1/'`
echo "# This file contains a table of character encoding aliases,"
echo "# suitable for operating system '${os}'."
echo "# It was automatically generated from config.charset."
# List of references, updated during installation:
echo "# Packages using this file: "
case "$os" in
linux* | *-gnu*)
# With glibc-2.1 or newer, we don't need any canonicalization,
# because glibc has iconv and both glibc and libiconv support all
# GNU canonical names directly. Therefore, the Makefile does not
# need to install the alias file at all.
# The following applies only to glibc-2.0.x and older libcs.
echo "ISO_646.IRV:1983 ASCII"
;;
aix*)
echo "ISO8859-1 ISO-8859-1"
echo "ISO8859-2 ISO-8859-2"
echo "ISO8859-5 ISO-8859-5"
echo "ISO8859-6 ISO-8859-6"
echo "ISO8859-7 ISO-8859-7"
echo "ISO8859-8 ISO-8859-8"
echo "ISO8859-9 ISO-8859-9"
echo "ISO8859-15 ISO-8859-15"
echo "IBM-850 CP850"
echo "IBM-856 CP856"
echo "IBM-921 ISO-8859-13"
echo "IBM-922 CP922"
echo "IBM-932 CP932"
echo "IBM-943 CP943"
echo "IBM-1046 CP1046"
echo "IBM-1124 CP1124"
echo "IBM-1129 CP1129"
echo "IBM-1252 CP1252"
echo "IBM-eucCN GB2312"
echo "IBM-eucJP EUC-JP"
echo "IBM-eucKR EUC-KR"
echo "IBM-eucTW EUC-TW"
echo "big5 BIG5"
echo "GBK GBK"
echo "TIS-620 TIS-620"
echo "UTF-8 UTF-8"
;;
hpux*)
echo "iso88591 ISO-8859-1"
echo "iso88592 ISO-8859-2"
echo "iso88595 ISO-8859-5"
echo "iso88596 ISO-8859-6"
echo "iso88597 ISO-8859-7"
echo "iso88598 ISO-8859-8"
echo "iso88599 ISO-8859-9"
echo "iso885915 ISO-8859-15"
echo "roman8 HP-ROMAN8"
echo "arabic8 HP-ARABIC8"
echo "greek8 HP-GREEK8"
echo "hebrew8 HP-HEBREW8"
echo "turkish8 HP-TURKISH8"
echo "kana8 HP-KANA8"
echo "tis620 TIS-620"
echo "big5 BIG5"
echo "eucJP EUC-JP"
echo "eucKR EUC-KR"
echo "eucTW EUC-TW"
echo "hp15CN GB2312"
#echo "ccdc ?" # what is this?
echo "SJIS SHIFT_JIS"
echo "utf8 UTF-8"
;;
irix*)
echo "ISO8859-1 ISO-8859-1"
echo "ISO8859-2 ISO-8859-2"
echo "ISO8859-5 ISO-8859-5"
echo "ISO8859-7 ISO-8859-7"
echo "ISO8859-9 ISO-8859-9"
echo "eucCN GB2312"
echo "eucJP EUC-JP"
echo "eucKR EUC-KR"
echo "eucTW EUC-TW"
;;
osf*)
echo "ISO8859-1 ISO-8859-1"
echo "ISO8859-2 ISO-8859-2"
echo "ISO8859-4 ISO-8859-4"
echo "ISO8859-5 ISO-8859-5"
echo "ISO8859-7 ISO-8859-7"
echo "ISO8859-8 ISO-8859-8"
echo "ISO8859-9 ISO-8859-9"
echo "ISO8859-15 ISO-8859-15"
echo "cp850 CP850"
echo "big5 BIG5"
echo "dechanyu DEC-HANYU"
echo "dechanzi GB2312"
echo "deckanji DEC-KANJI"
echo "deckorean EUC-KR"
echo "eucJP EUC-JP"
echo "eucKR EUC-KR"
echo "eucTW EUC-TW"
echo "GBK GBK"
echo "KSC5601 CP949"
echo "sdeckanji EUC-JP"
echo "SJIS SHIFT_JIS"
echo "TACTIS TIS-620"
echo "UTF-8 UTF-8"
;;
solaris*)
echo "646 ASCII"
echo "ISO8859-1 ISO-8859-1"
echo "ISO8859-2 ISO-8859-2"
echo "ISO8859-3 ISO-8859-3"
echo "ISO8859-4 ISO-8859-4"
echo "ISO8859-5 ISO-8859-5"
echo "ISO8859-6 ISO-8859-6"
echo "ISO8859-7 ISO-8859-7"
echo "ISO8859-8 ISO-8859-8"
echo "ISO8859-9 ISO-8859-9"
echo "ISO8859-15 ISO-8859-15"
echo "koi8-r KOI8-R"
echo "ansi-1251 CP1251"
echo "BIG5 BIG5"
echo "Big5-HKSCS BIG5-HKSCS"
echo "gb2312 GB2312"
echo "GBK GBK"
echo "GB18030 GB18030"
echo "cns11643 EUC-TW"
echo "5601 EUC-KR"
echo "ko_KR.johap92 JOHAB"
echo "eucJP EUC-JP"
echo "PCK SHIFT_JIS"
echo "TIS620.2533 TIS-620"
#echo "sun_eu_greek ?" # what is this?
echo "UTF-8 UTF-8"
;;
freebsd* | os2*)
# FreeBSD 4.2 doesn't have nl_langinfo(CODESET); therefore
# localcharset.c falls back to using the full locale name
# from the environment variables.
# Likewise for OS/2. OS/2 has XFree86 just like FreeBSD. Just
# reuse FreeBSD's locale data for OS/2.
echo "C ASCII"
echo "US-ASCII ASCII"
for l in la_LN lt_LN; do
echo "$l.ASCII ASCII"
done
for l in da_DK de_AT de_CH de_DE en_AU en_CA en_GB en_US es_ES \
fi_FI fr_BE fr_CA fr_CH fr_FR is_IS it_CH it_IT la_LN \
lt_LN nl_BE nl_NL no_NO pt_PT sv_SE; do
echo "$l.ISO_8859-1 ISO-8859-1"
echo "$l.DIS_8859-15 ISO-8859-15"
done
for l in cs_CZ hr_HR hu_HU la_LN lt_LN pl_PL sl_SI; do
echo "$l.ISO_8859-2 ISO-8859-2"
done
for l in la_LN lt_LT; do
echo "$l.ISO_8859-4 ISO-8859-4"
done
for l in ru_RU ru_SU; do
echo "$l.KOI8-R KOI8-R"
echo "$l.ISO_8859-5 ISO-8859-5"
echo "$l.CP866 CP866"
done
echo "uk_UA.KOI8-U KOI8-U"
echo "zh_TW.BIG5 BIG5"
echo "zh_TW.Big5 BIG5"
echo "zh_CN.EUC GB2312"
echo "ja_JP.EUC EUC-JP"
echo "ja_JP.SJIS SHIFT_JIS"
echo "ja_JP.Shift_JIS SHIFT_JIS"
echo "ko_KR.EUC EUC-KR"
;;
netbsd*)
echo "646 ASCII"
echo "ISO8859-1 ISO-8859-1"
echo "ISO8859-2 ISO-8859-2"
echo "ISO8859-4 ISO-8859-4"
echo "ISO8859-5 ISO-8859-5"
echo "ISO8859-15 ISO-8859-15"
echo "eucCN GB2312"
echo "eucJP EUC-JP"
echo "eucKR EUC-KR"
echo "eucTW EUC-TW"
echo "BIG5 BIG5"
echo "SJIS SHIFT_JIS"
;;
beos*)
# BeOS has a single locale, and it has UTF-8 encoding.
echo "* UTF-8"
;;
msdosdjgpp*)
# DJGPP 2.03 doesn't have nl_langinfo(CODESET); therefore
# localcharset.c falls back to using the full locale name
# from the environment variables.
echo "#"
echo "# The encodings given here may not all be correct."
echo "# If you find that the encoding given for your language and"
echo "# country is not the one your DOS machine actually uses, just"
echo "# correct it in this file, and send a mail to"
echo "# Juan Manuel Guerrero <st001906@hrz1.hrz.tu-darmstadt.de>"
echo "# and Bruno Haible <bruno@clisp.org>."
echo "#"
echo "C ASCII"
# ISO-8859-1 languages
echo "ca CP850"
echo "ca_ES CP850"
echo "da CP865" # not CP850 ??
echo "da_DK CP865" # not CP850 ??
echo "de CP850"
echo "de_AT CP850"
echo "de_CH CP850"
echo "de_DE CP850"
echo "en CP850"
echo "en_AU CP850" # not CP437 ??
echo "en_CA CP850"
echo "en_GB CP850"
echo "en_NZ CP437"
echo "en_US CP437"
echo "en_ZA CP850" # not CP437 ??
echo "es CP850"
echo "es_AR CP850"
echo "es_BO CP850"
echo "es_CL CP850"
echo "es_CO CP850"
echo "es_CR CP850"
echo "es_CU CP850"
echo "es_DO CP850"
echo "es_EC CP850"
echo "es_ES CP850"
echo "es_GT CP850"
echo "es_HN CP850"
echo "es_MX CP850"
echo "es_NI CP850"
echo "es_PA CP850"
echo "es_PY CP850"
echo "es_PE CP850"
echo "es_SV CP850"
echo "es_UY CP850"
echo "es_VE CP850"
echo "et CP850"
echo "et_EE CP850"
echo "eu CP850"
echo "eu_ES CP850"
echo "fi CP850"
echo "fi_FI CP850"
echo "fr CP850"
echo "fr_BE CP850"
echo "fr_CA CP850"
echo "fr_CH CP850"
echo "fr_FR CP850"
echo "ga CP850"
echo "ga_IE CP850"
echo "gd CP850"
echo "gd_GB CP850"
echo "gl CP850"
echo "gl_ES CP850"
echo "id CP850" # not CP437 ??
echo "id_ID CP850" # not CP437 ??
echo "is CP861" # not CP850 ??
echo "is_IS CP861" # not CP850 ??
echo "it CP850"
echo "it_CH CP850"
echo "it_IT CP850"
echo "lt CP775"
echo "lt_LT CP775"
echo "lv CP775"
echo "lv_LV CP775"
echo "nb CP865" # not CP850 ??
echo "nb_NO CP865" # not CP850 ??
echo "nl CP850"
echo "nl_BE CP850"
echo "nl_NL CP850"
echo "nn CP865" # not CP850 ??
echo "nn_NO CP865" # not CP850 ??
echo "no CP865" # not CP850 ??
echo "no_NO CP865" # not CP850 ??
echo "pt CP850"
echo "pt_BR CP850"
echo "pt_PT CP850"
echo "sv CP850"
echo "sv_SE CP850"
# ISO-8859-2 languages
echo "cs CP852"
echo "cs_CZ CP852"
echo "hr CP852"
echo "hr_HR CP852"
echo "hu CP852"
echo "hu_HU CP852"
echo "pl CP852"
echo "pl_PL CP852"
echo "ro CP852"
echo "ro_RO CP852"
echo "sk CP852"
echo "sk_SK CP852"
echo "sl CP852"
echo "sl_SI CP852"
echo "sq CP852"
echo "sq_AL CP852"
echo "sr CP852" # CP852 or CP866 or CP855 ??
echo "sr_YU CP852" # CP852 or CP866 or CP855 ??
# ISO-8859-3 languages
echo "mt CP850"
echo "mt_MT CP850"
# ISO-8859-5 languages
echo "be CP866"
echo "be_BE CP866"
echo "bg CP866" # not CP855 ??
echo "bg_BG CP866" # not CP855 ??
echo "mk CP866" # not CP855 ??
echo "mk_MK CP866" # not CP855 ??
echo "ru CP866"
echo "ru_RU CP866"
echo "uk CP1125"
echo "uk_UA CP1125"
# ISO-8859-6 languages
echo "ar CP864"
echo "ar_AE CP864"
echo "ar_DZ CP864"
echo "ar_EG CP864"
echo "ar_IQ CP864"
echo "ar_IR CP864"
echo "ar_JO CP864"
echo "ar_KW CP864"
echo "ar_MA CP864"
echo "ar_OM CP864"
echo "ar_QA CP864"
echo "ar_SA CP864"
echo "ar_SY CP864"
# ISO-8859-7 languages
echo "el CP869"
echo "el_GR CP869"
# ISO-8859-8 languages
echo "he CP862"
echo "he_IL CP862"
# ISO-8859-9 languages
echo "tr CP857"
echo "tr_TR CP857"
# Japanese
echo "ja CP932"
echo "ja_JP CP932"
# Chinese
echo "zh_CN GBK"
echo "zh_TW CP950" # not CP938 ??
# Korean
echo "kr CP949" # not CP934 ??
echo "kr_KR CP949" # not CP934 ??
# Thai
echo "th CP874"
echo "th_TH CP874"
# Other
echo "eo CP850"
echo "eo_EO CP850"
;;
esac
lib/intl/dcgettext.c
+59
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
/* Implementation of the dcgettext(3) function.
Copyright (C) 1995-1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include "gettextP.h"
#ifdef _LIBC
# include <libintl.h>
#else
# include "libgnuintl.h"
#endif
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
/* Names for the libintl functions are a problem. They must not clash
with existing names and they should follow ANSI C. But this source
code is also used in GNU C Library where the names have a __
prefix. So we have to make a difference here. */
#ifdef _LIBC
# define DCGETTEXT __dcgettext
# define DCIGETTEXT __dcigettext
#else
# define DCGETTEXT libintl_dcgettext
# define DCIGETTEXT libintl_dcigettext
#endif
/* Look up MSGID in the DOMAINNAME message catalog for the current CATEGORY
locale. */
char *
DCGETTEXT (domainname, msgid, category)
const char *domainname;
const char *msgid;
int category;
{
return DCIGETTEXT (domainname, msgid, NULL, 0, 0, category);
}
#ifdef _LIBC
/* Alias for function name in GNU C Library. */
INTDEF(__dcgettext)
weak_alias (__dcgettext, dcgettext);
#endif
lib/intl/dcigettext.c
+1238
View File
File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff
lib/intl/dcngettext.c
+60
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
/* Implementation of the dcngettext(3) function.
Copyright (C) 1995-1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include "gettextP.h"
#ifdef _LIBC
# include <libintl.h>
#else
# include "libgnuintl.h"
#endif
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
/* Names for the libintl functions are a problem. They must not clash
with existing names and they should follow ANSI C. But this source
code is also used in GNU C Library where the names have a __
prefix. So we have to make a difference here. */
#ifdef _LIBC
# define DCNGETTEXT __dcngettext
# define DCIGETTEXT __dcigettext
#else
# define DCNGETTEXT libintl_dcngettext
# define DCIGETTEXT libintl_dcigettext
#endif
/* Look up MSGID in the DOMAINNAME message catalog for the current CATEGORY
locale. */
char *
DCNGETTEXT (domainname, msgid1, msgid2, n, category)
const char *domainname;
const char *msgid1;
const char *msgid2;
unsigned long int n;
int category;
{
return DCIGETTEXT (domainname, msgid1, msgid2, 1, n, category);
}
#ifdef _LIBC
/* Alias for function name in GNU C Library. */
weak_alias (__dcngettext, dcngettext);
#endif
lib/intl/dgettext.c
+59
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
/* Implementation of the dgettext(3) function.
Copyright (C) 1995-1997, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <locale.h>
#include "gettextP.h"
#ifdef _LIBC
# include <libintl.h>
#else
# include "libgnuintl.h"
#endif
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
/* Names for the libintl functions are a problem. They must not clash
with existing names and they should follow ANSI C. But this source
code is also used in GNU C Library where the names have a __
prefix. So we have to make a difference here. */
#ifdef _LIBC
# define DGETTEXT __dgettext
# define DCGETTEXT INTUSE(__dcgettext)
#else
# define DGETTEXT libintl_dgettext
# define DCGETTEXT libintl_dcgettext
#endif
/* Look up MSGID in the DOMAINNAME message catalog of the current
LC_MESSAGES locale. */
char *
DGETTEXT (domainname, msgid)
const char *domainname;
const char *msgid;
{
return DCGETTEXT (domainname, msgid, LC_MESSAGES);
}
#ifdef _LIBC
/* Alias for function name in GNU C Library. */
weak_alias (__dgettext, dgettext);
#endif
lib/intl/dngettext.c
+61
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
/* Implementation of the dngettext(3) function.
Copyright (C) 1995-1997, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <locale.h>
#include "gettextP.h"
#ifdef _LIBC
# include <libintl.h>
#else
# include "libgnuintl.h"
#endif
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
/* Names for the libintl functions are a problem. They must not clash
with existing names and they should follow ANSI C. But this source
code is also used in GNU C Library where the names have a __
prefix. So we have to make a difference here. */
#ifdef _LIBC
# define DNGETTEXT __dngettext
# define DCNGETTEXT __dcngettext
#else
# define DNGETTEXT libintl_dngettext
# define DCNGETTEXT libintl_dcngettext
#endif
/* Look up MSGID in the DOMAINNAME message catalog of the current
LC_MESSAGES locale and skip message according to the plural form. */
char *
DNGETTEXT (domainname, msgid1, msgid2, n)
const char *domainname;
const char *msgid1;
const char *msgid2;
unsigned long int n;
{
return DCNGETTEXT (domainname, msgid1, msgid2, n, LC_MESSAGES);
}
#ifdef _LIBC
/* Alias for function name in GNU C Library. */
weak_alias (__dngettext, dngettext);
#endif
lib/intl/eval-plural.h
+114
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
/* Plural expression evaluation.
Copyright (C) 2000-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifndef STATIC
#define STATIC static
#endif
/* Evaluate the plural expression and return an index value. */
STATIC unsigned long int plural_eval PARAMS ((struct expression *pexp,
unsigned long int n))
internal_function;
STATIC
unsigned long int
internal_function
plural_eval (pexp, n)
struct expression *pexp;
unsigned long int n;
{
switch (pexp->nargs)
{
case 0:
switch (pexp->operation)
{
case var:
return n;
case num:
return pexp->val.num;
default:
break;
}
/* NOTREACHED */
break;
case 1:
{
/* pexp->operation must be lnot. */
unsigned long int arg = plural_eval (pexp->val.args[0], n);
return ! arg;
}
case 2:
{
unsigned long int leftarg = plural_eval (pexp->val.args[0], n);
if (pexp->operation == lor)
return leftarg || plural_eval (pexp->val.args[1], n);
else if (pexp->operation == land)
return leftarg && plural_eval (pexp->val.args[1], n);
else
{
unsigned long int rightarg = plural_eval (pexp->val.args[1], n);
switch (pexp->operation)
{
case mult:
return leftarg * rightarg;
case divide:
#if !INTDIV0_RAISES_SIGFPE
if (rightarg == 0)
raise (SIGFPE);
#endif
return leftarg / rightarg;
case module:
#if !INTDIV0_RAISES_SIGFPE
if (rightarg == 0)
raise (SIGFPE);
#endif
return leftarg % rightarg;
case plus:
return leftarg + rightarg;
case minus:
return leftarg - rightarg;
case less_than:
return leftarg < rightarg;
case greater_than:
return leftarg > rightarg;
case less_or_equal:
return leftarg <= rightarg;
case greater_or_equal:
return leftarg >= rightarg;
case equal:
return leftarg == rightarg;
case not_equal:
return leftarg != rightarg;
default:
break;
}
}
/* NOTREACHED */
break;
}
case 3:
{
/* pexp->operation must be qmop. */
unsigned long int boolarg = plural_eval (pexp->val.args[0], n);
return plural_eval (pexp->val.args[boolarg ? 1 : 2], n);
}
}
/* NOTREACHED */
return 0;
}
lib/intl/explodename.c
+192
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,192 @@
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Contributed by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@gnu.ai.mit.edu>, 1995.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include "loadinfo.h"
/* On some strange systems still no definition of NULL is found. Sigh! */
#ifndef NULL
# if defined __STDC__ && __STDC__
# define NULL ((void *) 0)
# else
# define NULL 0
# endif
#endif
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
char *
_nl_find_language (name)
const char *name;
{
while (name[0] != '\0' && name[0] != '_' && name[0] != '@'
&& name[0] != '+' && name[0] != ',')
++name;
return (char *) name;
}
int
_nl_explode_name (name, language, modifier, territory, codeset,
normalized_codeset, special, sponsor, revision)
char *name;
const char **language;
const char **modifier;
const char **territory;
const char **codeset;
const char **normalized_codeset;
const char **special;
const char **sponsor;
const char **revision;
{
enum { undecided, xpg, cen } syntax;
char *cp;
int mask;
*modifier = NULL;
*territory = NULL;
*codeset = NULL;
*normalized_codeset = NULL;
*special = NULL;
*sponsor = NULL;
*revision = NULL;
/* Now we determine the single parts of the locale name. First
look for the language. Termination symbols are `_' and `@' if
we use XPG4 style, and `_', `+', and `,' if we use CEN syntax. */
mask = 0;
syntax = undecided;
*language = cp = name;
cp = _nl_find_language (*language);
if (*language == cp)
/* This does not make sense: language has to be specified. Use
this entry as it is without exploding. Perhaps it is an alias. */
cp = strchr (*language, '\0');
else if (cp[0] == '_')
{
/* Next is the territory. */
cp[0] = '\0';
*territory = ++cp;
while (cp[0] != '\0' && cp[0] != '.' && cp[0] != '@'
&& cp[0] != '+' && cp[0] != ',' && cp[0] != '_')
++cp;
mask |= TERRITORY;
if (cp[0] == '.')
{
/* Next is the codeset. */
syntax = xpg;
cp[0] = '\0';
*codeset = ++cp;
while (cp[0] != '\0' && cp[0] != '@')
++cp;
mask |= XPG_CODESET;
if (*codeset != cp && (*codeset)[0] != '\0')
{
*normalized_codeset = _nl_normalize_codeset (*codeset,
cp - *codeset);
if (strcmp (*codeset, *normalized_codeset) == 0)
free ((char *) *normalized_codeset);
else
mask |= XPG_NORM_CODESET;
}
}
}
if (cp[0] == '@' || (syntax != xpg && cp[0] == '+'))
{
/* Next is the modifier. */
syntax = cp[0] == '@' ? xpg : cen;
cp[0] = '\0';
*modifier = ++cp;
while (syntax == cen && cp[0] != '\0' && cp[0] != '+'
&& cp[0] != ',' && cp[0] != '_')
++cp;
mask |= XPG_MODIFIER | CEN_AUDIENCE;
}
if (syntax != xpg && (cp[0] == '+' || cp[0] == ',' || cp[0] == '_'))
{
syntax = cen;
if (cp[0] == '+')
{
/* Next is special application (CEN syntax). */
cp[0] = '\0';
*special = ++cp;
while (cp[0] != '\0' && cp[0] != ',' && cp[0] != '_')
++cp;
mask |= CEN_SPECIAL;
}
if (cp[0] == ',')
{
/* Next is sponsor (CEN syntax). */
cp[0] = '\0';
*sponsor = ++cp;
while (cp[0] != '\0' && cp[0] != '_')
++cp;
mask |= CEN_SPONSOR;
}
if (cp[0] == '_')
{
/* Next is revision (CEN syntax). */
cp[0] = '\0';
*revision = ++cp;
mask |= CEN_REVISION;
}
}
/* For CEN syntax values it might be important to have the
separator character in the file name, not for XPG syntax. */
if (syntax == xpg)
{
if (*territory != NULL && (*territory)[0] == '\0')
mask &= ~TERRITORY;
if (*codeset != NULL && (*codeset)[0] == '\0')
mask &= ~XPG_CODESET;
if (*modifier != NULL && (*modifier)[0] == '\0')
mask &= ~XPG_MODIFIER;
}
return mask;
}
lib/intl/finddomain.c
+195
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,195 @@
/* Handle list of needed message catalogs
Copyright (C) 1995-1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Written by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@gnu.org>, 1995.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <stdio.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#if defined HAVE_UNISTD_H || defined _LIBC
# include <unistd.h>
#endif
#include "gettextP.h"
#ifdef _LIBC
# include <libintl.h>
#else
# include "libgnuintl.h"
#endif
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
/* List of already loaded domains. */
static struct loaded_l10nfile *_nl_loaded_domains;
/* Return a data structure describing the message catalog described by
the DOMAINNAME and CATEGORY parameters with respect to the currently
established bindings. */
struct loaded_l10nfile *
internal_function
_nl_find_domain (dirname, locale, domainname, domainbinding)
const char *dirname;
char *locale;
const char *domainname;
struct binding *domainbinding;
{
struct loaded_l10nfile *retval;
const char *language;
const char *modifier;
const char *territory;
const char *codeset;
const char *normalized_codeset;
const char *special;
const char *sponsor;
const char *revision;
const char *alias_value;
int mask;
/* LOCALE can consist of up to four recognized parts for the XPG syntax:
language[_territory[.codeset]][@modifier]
and six parts for the CEN syntax:
language[_territory][+audience][+special][,[sponsor][_revision]]
Beside the first part all of them are allowed to be missing. If
the full specified locale is not found, the less specific one are
looked for. The various parts will be stripped off according to
the following order:
(1) revision
(2) sponsor
(3) special
(4) codeset
(5) normalized codeset
(6) territory
(7) audience/modifier
*/
/* If we have already tested for this locale entry there has to
be one data set in the list of loaded domains. */
retval = _nl_make_l10nflist (&_nl_loaded_domains, dirname,
strlen (dirname) + 1, 0, locale, NULL, NULL,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, domainname, 0);
if (retval != NULL)
{
/* We know something about this locale. */
int cnt;
if (retval->decided == 0)
_nl_load_domain (retval, domainbinding);
if (retval->data != NULL)
return retval;
for (cnt = 0; retval->successor[cnt] != NULL; ++cnt)
{
if (retval->successor[cnt]->decided == 0)
_nl_load_domain (retval->successor[cnt], domainbinding);
if (retval->successor[cnt]->data != NULL)
break;
}
return cnt >= 0 ? retval : NULL;
/* NOTREACHED */
}
/* See whether the locale value is an alias. If yes its value
*overwrites* the alias name. No test for the original value is
done. */
alias_value = _nl_expand_alias (locale);
if (alias_value != NULL)
{
#if defined _LIBC || defined HAVE_STRDUP
locale = strdup (alias_value);
if (locale == NULL)
return NULL;
#else
size_t len = strlen (alias_value) + 1;
locale = (char *) malloc (len);
if (locale == NULL)
return NULL;
memcpy (locale, alias_value, len);
#endif
}
/* Now we determine the single parts of the locale name. First
look for the language. Termination symbols are `_' and `@' if
we use XPG4 style, and `_', `+', and `,' if we use CEN syntax. */
mask = _nl_explode_name (locale, &language, &modifier, &territory,
&codeset, &normalized_codeset, &special,
&sponsor, &revision);
/* Create all possible locale entries which might be interested in
generalization. */
retval = _nl_make_l10nflist (&_nl_loaded_domains, dirname,
strlen (dirname) + 1, mask, language, territory,
codeset, normalized_codeset, modifier, special,
sponsor, revision, domainname, 1);
if (retval == NULL)
/* This means we are out of core. */
return NULL;
if (retval->decided == 0)
_nl_load_domain (retval, domainbinding);
if (retval->data == NULL)
{
int cnt;
for (cnt = 0; retval->successor[cnt] != NULL; ++cnt)
{
if (retval->successor[cnt]->decided == 0)
_nl_load_domain (retval->successor[cnt], domainbinding);
if (retval->successor[cnt]->data != NULL)
break;
}
}
/* The room for an alias was dynamically allocated. Free it now. */
if (alias_value != NULL)
free (locale);
/* The space for normalized_codeset is dynamically allocated. Free it. */
if (mask & XPG_NORM_CODESET)
free ((void *) normalized_codeset);
return retval;
}
#ifdef _LIBC
libc_freeres_fn (free_mem)
{
struct loaded_l10nfile *runp = _nl_loaded_domains;
while (runp != NULL)
{
struct loaded_l10nfile *here = runp;
if (runp->data != NULL)
_nl_unload_domain ((struct loaded_domain *) runp->data);
runp = runp->next;
free ((char *) here->filename);
free (here);
}
}
#endif
lib/intl/gettext.c
+64
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
/* Implementation of gettext(3) function.
Copyright (C) 1995, 1997, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#ifdef _LIBC
# define __need_NULL
# include <stddef.h>
#else
# include <stdlib.h> /* Just for NULL. */
#endif
#include "gettextP.h"
#ifdef _LIBC
# include <libintl.h>
#else
# include "libgnuintl.h"
#endif
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
/* Names for the libintl functions are a problem. They must not clash
with existing names and they should follow ANSI C. But this source
code is also used in GNU C Library where the names have a __
prefix. So we have to make a difference here. */
#ifdef _LIBC
# define GETTEXT __gettext
# define DCGETTEXT INTUSE(__dcgettext)
#else
# define GETTEXT libintl_gettext
# define DCGETTEXT libintl_dcgettext
#endif
/* Look up MSGID in the current default message catalog for the current
LC_MESSAGES locale. If not found, returns MSGID itself (the default
text). */
char *
GETTEXT (msgid)
const char *msgid;
{
return DCGETTEXT (NULL, msgid, LC_MESSAGES);
}
#ifdef _LIBC
/* Alias for function name in GNU C Library. */
weak_alias (__gettext, gettext);
#endif
lib/intl/gettextP.h
+224
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
/* Header describing internals of libintl library.
Copyright (C) 1995-1999, 2000-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Written by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@cygnus.com>, 1995.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifndef _GETTEXTP_H
#define _GETTEXTP_H
#include <stddef.h> /* Get size_t. */
#ifdef _LIBC
# include "../iconv/gconv_int.h"
#else
# if HAVE_ICONV
# include <iconv.h>
# endif
#endif
#include "loadinfo.h"
#include "gmo.h" /* Get nls_uint32. */
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
#ifndef PARAMS
# if __STDC__ || defined __GNUC__ || defined __SUNPRO_C || defined __cplusplus || __PROTOTYPES
# define PARAMS(args) args
# else
# define PARAMS(args) ()
# endif
#endif
#ifndef internal_function
# define internal_function
#endif
#ifndef attribute_hidden
# define attribute_hidden
#endif
/* Tell the compiler when a conditional or integer expression is
almost always true or almost always false. */
#ifndef HAVE_BUILTIN_EXPECT
# define __builtin_expect(expr, val) (expr)
#endif
#ifndef W
# define W(flag, data) ((flag) ? SWAP (data) : (data))
#endif
#ifdef _LIBC
# include <byteswap.h>
# define SWAP(i) bswap_32 (i)
#else
static inline nls_uint32
SWAP (i)
nls_uint32 i;
{
return (i << 24) | ((i & 0xff00) << 8) | ((i >> 8) & 0xff00) | (i >> 24);
}
#endif
/* In-memory representation of system dependent string. */
struct sysdep_string_desc
{
/* Length of addressed string, including the trailing NUL. */
size_t length;
/* Pointer to addressed string. */
const char *pointer;
};
/* The representation of an opened message catalog. */
struct loaded_domain
{
/* Pointer to memory containing the .mo file. */
const char *data;
/* 1 if the memory is mmap()ed, 0 if the memory is malloc()ed. */
int use_mmap;
/* Size of mmap()ed memory. */
size_t mmap_size;
/* 1 if the .mo file uses a different endianness than this machine. */
int must_swap;
/* Pointer to additional malloc()ed memory. */
void *malloced;
/* Number of static strings pairs. */
nls_uint32 nstrings;
/* Pointer to descriptors of original strings in the file. */
const struct string_desc *orig_tab;
/* Pointer to descriptors of translated strings in the file. */
const struct string_desc *trans_tab;
/* Number of system dependent strings pairs. */
nls_uint32 n_sysdep_strings;
/* Pointer to descriptors of original sysdep strings. */
const struct sysdep_string_desc *orig_sysdep_tab;
/* Pointer to descriptors of translated sysdep strings. */
const struct sysdep_string_desc *trans_sysdep_tab;
/* Size of hash table. */
nls_uint32 hash_size;
/* Pointer to hash table. */
const nls_uint32 *hash_tab;
/* 1 if the hash table uses a different endianness than this machine. */
int must_swap_hash_tab;
int codeset_cntr;
#ifdef _LIBC
__gconv_t conv;
#else
# if HAVE_ICONV
iconv_t conv;
# endif
#endif
char **conv_tab;
struct expression *plural;
unsigned long int nplurals;
};
/* We want to allocate a string at the end of the struct. But ISO C
doesn't allow zero sized arrays. */
#ifdef __GNUC__
# define ZERO 0
#else
# define ZERO 1
#endif
/* A set of settings bound to a message domain. Used to store settings
from bindtextdomain() and bind_textdomain_codeset(). */
struct binding
{
struct binding *next;
char *dirname;
int codeset_cntr; /* Incremented each time codeset changes. */
char *codeset;
char domainname[ZERO];
};
/* A counter which is incremented each time some previous translations
become invalid.
This variable is part of the external ABI of the GNU libintl. */
extern int _nl_msg_cat_cntr;
#ifndef _LIBC
const char *_nl_locale_name PARAMS ((int category, const char *categoryname));
#endif
struct loaded_l10nfile *_nl_find_domain PARAMS ((const char *__dirname,
char *__locale,
const char *__domainname,
struct binding *__domainbinding))
internal_function;
void _nl_load_domain PARAMS ((struct loaded_l10nfile *__domain,
struct binding *__domainbinding))
internal_function;
void _nl_unload_domain PARAMS ((struct loaded_domain *__domain))
internal_function;
const char *_nl_init_domain_conv PARAMS ((struct loaded_l10nfile *__domain_file,
struct loaded_domain *__domain,
struct binding *__domainbinding))
internal_function;
void _nl_free_domain_conv PARAMS ((struct loaded_domain *__domain))
internal_function;
char *_nl_find_msg PARAMS ((struct loaded_l10nfile *domain_file,
struct binding *domainbinding,
const char *msgid, size_t *lengthp))
internal_function;
#ifdef _LIBC
extern char *__gettext PARAMS ((const char *__msgid));
extern char *__dgettext PARAMS ((const char *__domainname,
const char *__msgid));
extern char *__dcgettext PARAMS ((const char *__domainname,
const char *__msgid, int __category));
extern char *__ngettext PARAMS ((const char *__msgid1, const char *__msgid2,
unsigned long int __n));
extern char *__dngettext PARAMS ((const char *__domainname,
const char *__msgid1, const char *__msgid2,
unsigned long int n));
extern char *__dcngettext PARAMS ((const char *__domainname,
const char *__msgid1, const char *__msgid2,
unsigned long int __n, int __category));
extern char *__dcigettext PARAMS ((const char *__domainname,
const char *__msgid1, const char *__msgid2,
int __plural, unsigned long int __n,
int __category));
extern char *__textdomain PARAMS ((const char *__domainname));
extern char *__bindtextdomain PARAMS ((const char *__domainname,
const char *__dirname));
extern char *__bind_textdomain_codeset PARAMS ((const char *__domainname,
const char *__codeset));
#else
/* Declare the exported libintl_* functions, in a way that allows us to
call them under their real name. */
# define _INTL_REDIRECT_MACROS
# include "libgnuintl.h"
extern char *libintl_dcigettext PARAMS ((const char *__domainname,
const char *__msgid1,
const char *__msgid2,
int __plural, unsigned long int __n,
int __category));
#endif
/* @@ begin of epilog @@ */
#endif /* gettextP.h */
lib/intl/gmo.h
+148
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
/* Description of GNU message catalog format: general file layout.
Copyright (C) 1995, 1997, 2000-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifndef _GETTEXT_H
#define _GETTEXT_H 1
#include <limits.h>
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
/* The magic number of the GNU message catalog format. */
#define _MAGIC 0x950412de
#define _MAGIC_SWAPPED 0xde120495
/* Revision number of the currently used .mo (binary) file format. */
#define MO_REVISION_NUMBER 0
/* The following contortions are an attempt to use the C preprocessor
to determine an unsigned integral type that is 32 bits wide. An
alternative approach is to use autoconf's AC_CHECK_SIZEOF macro, but
as of version autoconf-2.13, the AC_CHECK_SIZEOF macro doesn't work
when cross-compiling. */
#if __STDC__
# define UINT_MAX_32_BITS 4294967295U
#else
# define UINT_MAX_32_BITS 0xFFFFFFFF
#endif
/* If UINT_MAX isn't defined, assume it's a 32-bit type.
This should be valid for all systems GNU cares about because
that doesn't include 16-bit systems, and only modern systems
(that certainly have <limits.h>) have 64+-bit integral types. */
#ifndef UINT_MAX
# define UINT_MAX UINT_MAX_32_BITS
#endif
#if UINT_MAX == UINT_MAX_32_BITS
typedef unsigned nls_uint32;
#else
# if USHRT_MAX == UINT_MAX_32_BITS
typedef unsigned short nls_uint32;
# else
# if ULONG_MAX == UINT_MAX_32_BITS
typedef unsigned long nls_uint32;
# else
/* The following line is intended to throw an error. Using #error is
not portable enough. */
"Cannot determine unsigned 32-bit data type."
# endif
# endif
#endif
/* Header for binary .mo file format. */
struct mo_file_header
{
/* The magic number. */
nls_uint32 magic;
/* The revision number of the file format. */
nls_uint32 revision;
/* The following are only used in .mo files with major revision 0. */
/* The number of strings pairs. */
nls_uint32 nstrings;
/* Offset of table with start offsets of original strings. */
nls_uint32 orig_tab_offset;
/* Offset of table with start offsets of translated strings. */
nls_uint32 trans_tab_offset;
/* Size of hash table. */
nls_uint32 hash_tab_size;
/* Offset of first hash table entry. */
nls_uint32 hash_tab_offset;
/* The following are only used in .mo files with minor revision >= 1. */
/* The number of system dependent segments. */
nls_uint32 n_sysdep_segments;
/* Offset of table describing system dependent segments. */
nls_uint32 sysdep_segments_offset;
/* The number of system dependent strings pairs. */
nls_uint32 n_sysdep_strings;
/* Offset of table with start offsets of original sysdep strings. */
nls_uint32 orig_sysdep_tab_offset;
/* Offset of table with start offsets of translated sysdep strings. */
nls_uint32 trans_sysdep_tab_offset;
};
/* Descriptor for static string contained in the binary .mo file. */
struct string_desc
{
/* Length of addressed string, not including the trailing NUL. */
nls_uint32 length;
/* Offset of string in file. */
nls_uint32 offset;
};
/* The following are only used in .mo files with minor revision >= 1. */
/* Descriptor for system dependent string segment. */
struct sysdep_segment
{
/* Length of addressed string, including the trailing NUL. */
nls_uint32 length;
/* Offset of string in file. */
nls_uint32 offset;
};
/* Descriptor for system dependent string. */
struct sysdep_string
{
/* Offset of static string segments in file. */
nls_uint32 offset;
/* Alternating sequence of static and system dependent segments.
The last segment is a static segment, including the trailing NUL. */
struct segment_pair
{
/* Size of static segment. */
nls_uint32 segsize;
/* Reference to system dependent string segment, or ~0 at the end. */
nls_uint32 sysdepref;
} segments[1];
};
/* Marker for the end of the segments[] array. This has the value 0xFFFFFFFF,
regardless whether 'int' is 16 bit, 32 bit, or 64 bit. */
#define SEGMENTS_END ((nls_uint32) ~0)
/* @@ begin of epilog @@ */
#endif /* gettext.h */
lib/intl/hash-string.h
+59
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
/* Description of GNU message catalog format: string hashing function.
Copyright (C) 1995, 1997, 1998, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
#ifndef PARAMS
# if __STDC__ || defined __GNUC__ || defined __SUNPRO_C || defined __cplusplus || __PROTOTYPES
# define PARAMS(Args) Args
# else
# define PARAMS(Args) ()
# endif
#endif
/* We assume to have `unsigned long int' value with at least 32 bits. */
#define HASHWORDBITS 32
/* Defines the so called `hashpjw' function by P.J. Weinberger
[see Aho/Sethi/Ullman, COMPILERS: Principles, Techniques and Tools,
1986, 1987 Bell Telephone Laboratories, Inc.] */
static unsigned long int hash_string PARAMS ((const char *__str_param));
static inline unsigned long int
hash_string (str_param)
const char *str_param;
{
unsigned long int hval, g;
const char *str = str_param;
/* Compute the hash value for the given string. */
hval = 0;
while (*str != '\0')
{
hval <<= 4;
hval += (unsigned long int) *str++;
g = hval & ((unsigned long int) 0xf << (HASHWORDBITS - 4));
if (g != 0)
{
hval ^= g >> (HASHWORDBITS - 8);
hval ^= g;
}
}
return hval;
}
lib/intl/intl-compat.c
+151
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
/* intl-compat.c - Stub functions to call gettext functions from GNU gettext
Library.
Copyright (C) 1995, 2000-2003 Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include "gettextP.h"
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
/* This file redirects the gettext functions (without prefix) to those
defined in the included GNU libintl library (with "libintl_" prefix).
It is compiled into libintl in order to make the AM_GNU_GETTEXT test
of gettext <= 0.11.2 work with the libintl library >= 0.11.3 which
has the redirections primarily in the <libintl.h> include file.
It is also compiled into libgnuintl so that libgnuintl.so can be used
as LD_PRELOADable library on glibc systems, to provide the extra
features that the functions in the libc don't have (namely, logging). */
#undef gettext
#undef dgettext
#undef dcgettext
#undef ngettext
#undef dngettext
#undef dcngettext
#undef textdomain
#undef bindtextdomain
#undef bind_textdomain_codeset
/* When building a DLL, we must export some functions. Note that because
the functions are only defined for binary backward compatibility, we
don't need to use __declspec(dllimport) in any case. */
#if defined _MSC_VER && BUILDING_DLL
# define DLL_EXPORTED __declspec(dllexport)
#else
# define DLL_EXPORTED
#endif
DLL_EXPORTED
char *
gettext (msgid)
const char *msgid;
{
return libintl_gettext (msgid);
}
DLL_EXPORTED
char *
dgettext (domainname, msgid)
const char *domainname;
const char *msgid;
{
return libintl_dgettext (domainname, msgid);
}
DLL_EXPORTED
char *
dcgettext (domainname, msgid, category)
const char *domainname;
const char *msgid;
int category;
{
return libintl_dcgettext (domainname, msgid, category);
}
DLL_EXPORTED
char *
ngettext (msgid1, msgid2, n)
const char *msgid1;
const char *msgid2;
unsigned long int n;
{
return libintl_ngettext (msgid1, msgid2, n);
}
DLL_EXPORTED
char *
dngettext (domainname, msgid1, msgid2, n)
const char *domainname;
const char *msgid1;
const char *msgid2;
unsigned long int n;
{
return libintl_dngettext (domainname, msgid1, msgid2, n);
}
DLL_EXPORTED
char *
dcngettext (domainname, msgid1, msgid2, n, category)
const char *domainname;
const char *msgid1;
const char *msgid2;
unsigned long int n;
int category;
{
return libintl_dcngettext (domainname, msgid1, msgid2, n, category);
}
DLL_EXPORTED
char *
textdomain (domainname)
const char *domainname;
{
return libintl_textdomain (domainname);
}
DLL_EXPORTED
char *
bindtextdomain (domainname, dirname)
const char *domainname;
const char *dirname;
{
return libintl_bindtextdomain (domainname, dirname);
}
DLL_EXPORTED
char *
bind_textdomain_codeset (domainname, codeset)
const char *domainname;
const char *codeset;
{
return libintl_bind_textdomain_codeset (domainname, codeset);
}
lib/intl/l10nflist.c
+453
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,453 @@
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Contributed by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@gnu.ai.mit.edu>, 1995.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
/* Tell glibc's <string.h> to provide a prototype for stpcpy().
This must come before <config.h> because <config.h> may include
<features.h>, and once <features.h> has been included, it's too late. */
#ifndef _GNU_SOURCE
# define _GNU_SOURCE 1
#endif
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <string.h>
#if defined _LIBC || defined HAVE_ARGZ_H
# include <argz.h>
#endif
#include <ctype.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include "loadinfo.h"
/* On some strange systems still no definition of NULL is found. Sigh! */
#ifndef NULL
# if defined __STDC__ && __STDC__
# define NULL ((void *) 0)
# else
# define NULL 0
# endif
#endif
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
#ifdef _LIBC
/* Rename the non ANSI C functions. This is required by the standard
because some ANSI C functions will require linking with this object
file and the name space must not be polluted. */
# ifndef stpcpy
# define stpcpy(dest, src) __stpcpy(dest, src)
# endif
#else
# ifndef HAVE_STPCPY
static char *stpcpy PARAMS ((char *dest, const char *src));
# endif
#endif
/* Pathname support.
ISSLASH(C) tests whether C is a directory separator character.
IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH(P) tests whether P is an absolute path. If it is not,
it may be concatenated to a directory pathname.
*/
#if defined _WIN32 || defined __WIN32__ || defined __EMX__ || defined __DJGPP__
/* Win32, OS/2, DOS */
# define ISSLASH(C) ((C) == '/' || (C) == '\\')
# define HAS_DEVICE(P) \
((((P)[0] >= 'A' && (P)[0] <= 'Z') || ((P)[0] >= 'a' && (P)[0] <= 'z')) \
&& (P)[1] == ':')
# define IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH(P) (ISSLASH ((P)[0]) || HAS_DEVICE (P))
#else
/* Unix */
# define ISSLASH(C) ((C) == '/')
# define IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH(P) ISSLASH ((P)[0])
#endif
/* Define function which are usually not available. */
#if !defined _LIBC && !defined HAVE___ARGZ_COUNT
/* Returns the number of strings in ARGZ. */
static size_t argz_count__ PARAMS ((const char *argz, size_t len));
static size_t
argz_count__ (argz, len)
const char *argz;
size_t len;
{
size_t count = 0;
while (len > 0)
{
size_t part_len = strlen (argz);
argz += part_len + 1;
len -= part_len + 1;
count++;
}
return count;
}
# undef __argz_count
# define __argz_count(argz, len) argz_count__ (argz, len)
#else
# ifdef _LIBC
# define __argz_count(argz, len) INTUSE(__argz_count) (argz, len)
# endif
#endif /* !_LIBC && !HAVE___ARGZ_COUNT */
#if !defined _LIBC && !defined HAVE___ARGZ_STRINGIFY
/* Make '\0' separated arg vector ARGZ printable by converting all the '\0's
except the last into the character SEP. */
static void argz_stringify__ PARAMS ((char *argz, size_t len, int sep));
static void
argz_stringify__ (argz, len, sep)
char *argz;
size_t len;
int sep;
{
while (len > 0)
{
size_t part_len = strlen (argz);
argz += part_len;
len -= part_len + 1;
if (len > 0)
*argz++ = sep;
}
}
# undef __argz_stringify
# define __argz_stringify(argz, len, sep) argz_stringify__ (argz, len, sep)
#else
# ifdef _LIBC
# define __argz_stringify(argz, len, sep) \
INTUSE(__argz_stringify) (argz, len, sep)
# endif
#endif /* !_LIBC && !HAVE___ARGZ_STRINGIFY */
#if !defined _LIBC && !defined HAVE___ARGZ_NEXT
static char *argz_next__ PARAMS ((char *argz, size_t argz_len,
const char *entry));
static char *
argz_next__ (argz, argz_len, entry)
char *argz;
size_t argz_len;
const char *entry;
{
if (entry)
{
if (entry < argz + argz_len)
entry = strchr (entry, '\0') + 1;
return entry >= argz + argz_len ? NULL : (char *) entry;
}
else
if (argz_len > 0)
return argz;
else
return 0;
}
# undef __argz_next
# define __argz_next(argz, len, entry) argz_next__ (argz, len, entry)
#endif /* !_LIBC && !HAVE___ARGZ_NEXT */
/* Return number of bits set in X. */
static int pop PARAMS ((int x));
static inline int
pop (x)
int x;
{
/* We assume that no more than 16 bits are used. */
x = ((x & ~0x5555) >> 1) + (x & 0x5555);
x = ((x & ~0x3333) >> 2) + (x & 0x3333);
x = ((x >> 4) + x) & 0x0f0f;
x = ((x >> 8) + x) & 0xff;
return x;
}
struct loaded_l10nfile *
_nl_make_l10nflist (l10nfile_list, dirlist, dirlist_len, mask, language,
territory, codeset, normalized_codeset, modifier, special,
sponsor, revision, filename, do_allocate)
struct loaded_l10nfile **l10nfile_list;
const char *dirlist;
size_t dirlist_len;
int mask;
const char *language;
const char *territory;
const char *codeset;
const char *normalized_codeset;
const char *modifier;
const char *special;
const char *sponsor;
const char *revision;
const char *filename;
int do_allocate;
{
char *abs_filename;
struct loaded_l10nfile **lastp;
struct loaded_l10nfile *retval;
char *cp;
size_t dirlist_count;
size_t entries;
int cnt;
/* If LANGUAGE contains an absolute directory specification, we ignore
DIRLIST. */
if (IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (language))
dirlist_len = 0;
/* Allocate room for the full file name. */
abs_filename = (char *) malloc (dirlist_len
+ strlen (language)
+ ((mask & TERRITORY) != 0
? strlen (territory) + 1 : 0)
+ ((mask & XPG_CODESET) != 0
? strlen (codeset) + 1 : 0)
+ ((mask & XPG_NORM_CODESET) != 0
? strlen (normalized_codeset) + 1 : 0)
+ (((mask & XPG_MODIFIER) != 0
|| (mask & CEN_AUDIENCE) != 0)
? strlen (modifier) + 1 : 0)
+ ((mask & CEN_SPECIAL) != 0
? strlen (special) + 1 : 0)
+ (((mask & CEN_SPONSOR) != 0
|| (mask & CEN_REVISION) != 0)
? (1 + ((mask & CEN_SPONSOR) != 0
? strlen (sponsor) : 0)
+ ((mask & CEN_REVISION) != 0
? strlen (revision) + 1 : 0)) : 0)
+ 1 + strlen (filename) + 1);
if (abs_filename == NULL)
return NULL;
/* Construct file name. */
cp = abs_filename;
if (dirlist_len > 0)
{
memcpy (cp, dirlist, dirlist_len);
__argz_stringify (cp, dirlist_len, PATH_SEPARATOR);
cp += dirlist_len;
cp[-1] = '/';
}
cp = stpcpy (cp, language);
if ((mask & TERRITORY) != 0)
{
*cp++ = '_';
cp = stpcpy (cp, territory);
}
if ((mask & XPG_CODESET) != 0)
{
*cp++ = '.';
cp = stpcpy (cp, codeset);
}
if ((mask & XPG_NORM_CODESET) != 0)
{
*cp++ = '.';
cp = stpcpy (cp, normalized_codeset);
}
if ((mask & (XPG_MODIFIER | CEN_AUDIENCE)) != 0)
{
/* This component can be part of both syntaces but has different
leading characters. For CEN we use `+', else `@'. */
*cp++ = (mask & CEN_AUDIENCE) != 0 ? '+' : '@';
cp = stpcpy (cp, modifier);
}
if ((mask & CEN_SPECIAL) != 0)
{
*cp++ = '+';
cp = stpcpy (cp, special);
}
if ((mask & (CEN_SPONSOR | CEN_REVISION)) != 0)
{
*cp++ = ',';
if ((mask & CEN_SPONSOR) != 0)
cp = stpcpy (cp, sponsor);
if ((mask & CEN_REVISION) != 0)
{
*cp++ = '_';
cp = stpcpy (cp, revision);
}
}
*cp++ = '/';
stpcpy (cp, filename);
/* Look in list of already loaded domains whether it is already
available. */
lastp = l10nfile_list;
for (retval = *l10nfile_list; retval != NULL; retval = retval->next)
if (retval->filename != NULL)
{
int compare = strcmp (retval->filename, abs_filename);
if (compare == 0)
/* We found it! */
break;
if (compare < 0)
{
/* It's not in the list. */
retval = NULL;
break;
}
lastp = &retval->next;
}
if (retval != NULL || do_allocate == 0)
{
free (abs_filename);
return retval;
}
dirlist_count = (dirlist_len > 0 ? __argz_count (dirlist, dirlist_len) : 1);
/* Allocate a new loaded_l10nfile. */
retval =
(struct loaded_l10nfile *)
malloc (sizeof (*retval)
+ (((dirlist_count << pop (mask)) + (dirlist_count > 1 ? 1 : 0))
* sizeof (struct loaded_l10nfile *)));
if (retval == NULL)
return NULL;
retval->filename = abs_filename;
/* We set retval->data to NULL here; it is filled in later.
Setting retval->decided to 1 here means that retval does not
correspond to a real file (dirlist_count > 1) or is not worth
looking up (if an unnormalized codeset was specified). */
retval->decided = (dirlist_count > 1
|| ((mask & XPG_CODESET) != 0
&& (mask & XPG_NORM_CODESET) != 0));
retval->data = NULL;
retval->next = *lastp;
*lastp = retval;
entries = 0;
/* Recurse to fill the inheritance list of RETVAL.
If the DIRLIST is a real list (i.e. DIRLIST_COUNT > 1), the RETVAL
entry does not correspond to a real file; retval->filename contains
colons. In this case we loop across all elements of DIRLIST and
across all bit patterns dominated by MASK.
If the DIRLIST is a single directory or entirely redundant (i.e.
DIRLIST_COUNT == 1), we loop across all bit patterns dominated by
MASK, excluding MASK itself.
In either case, we loop down from MASK to 0. This has the effect
that the extra bits in the locale name are dropped in this order:
first the modifier, then the territory, then the codeset, then the
normalized_codeset. */
for (cnt = dirlist_count > 1 ? mask : mask - 1; cnt >= 0; --cnt)
if ((cnt & ~mask) == 0
&& ((cnt & CEN_SPECIFIC) == 0 || (cnt & XPG_SPECIFIC) == 0)
&& ((cnt & XPG_CODESET) == 0 || (cnt & XPG_NORM_CODESET) == 0))
{
if (dirlist_count > 1)
{
/* Iterate over all elements of the DIRLIST. */
char *dir = NULL;
while ((dir = __argz_next ((char *) dirlist, dirlist_len, dir))
!= NULL)
retval->successor[entries++]
= _nl_make_l10nflist (l10nfile_list, dir, strlen (dir) + 1,
cnt, language, territory, codeset,
normalized_codeset, modifier, special,
sponsor, revision, filename, 1);
}
else
retval->successor[entries++]
= _nl_make_l10nflist (l10nfile_list, dirlist, dirlist_len,
cnt, language, territory, codeset,
normalized_codeset, modifier, special,
sponsor, revision, filename, 1);
}
retval->successor[entries] = NULL;
return retval;
}
/* Normalize codeset name. There is no standard for the codeset
names. Normalization allows the user to use any of the common
names. The return value is dynamically allocated and has to be
freed by the caller. */
const char *
_nl_normalize_codeset (codeset, name_len)
const char *codeset;
size_t name_len;
{
int len = 0;
int only_digit = 1;
char *retval;
char *wp;
size_t cnt;
for (cnt = 0; cnt < name_len; ++cnt)
if (isalnum ((unsigned char) codeset[cnt]))
{
++len;
if (isalpha ((unsigned char) codeset[cnt]))
only_digit = 0;
}
retval = (char *) malloc ((only_digit ? 3 : 0) + len + 1);
if (retval != NULL)
{
if (only_digit)
wp = stpcpy (retval, "iso");
else
wp = retval;
for (cnt = 0; cnt < name_len; ++cnt)
if (isalpha ((unsigned char) codeset[cnt]))
*wp++ = tolower ((unsigned char) codeset[cnt]);
else if (isdigit ((unsigned char) codeset[cnt]))
*wp++ = codeset[cnt];
*wp = '\0';
}
return (const char *) retval;
}
/* @@ begin of epilog @@ */
/* We don't want libintl.a to depend on any other library. So we
avoid the non-standard function stpcpy. In GNU C Library this
function is available, though. Also allow the symbol HAVE_STPCPY
to be defined. */
#if !_LIBC && !HAVE_STPCPY
static char *
stpcpy (dest, src)
char *dest;
const char *src;
{
while ((*dest++ = *src++) != '\0')
/* Do nothing. */ ;
return dest - 1;
}
#endif
lib/intl/libgnuintl.h.in
+309
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,309 @@
/* Message catalogs for internationalization.
Copyright (C) 1995-1997, 2000-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifndef _LIBINTL_H
#define _LIBINTL_H 1
#include <locale.h>
/* The LC_MESSAGES locale category is the category used by the functions
gettext() and dgettext(). It is specified in POSIX, but not in ANSI C.
On systems that don't define it, use an arbitrary value instead.
On Solaris, <locale.h> defines __LOCALE_H (or _LOCALE_H in Solaris 2.5)
then includes <libintl.h> (i.e. this file!) and then only defines
LC_MESSAGES. To avoid a redefinition warning, don't define LC_MESSAGES
in this case. */
#if !defined LC_MESSAGES && !(defined __LOCALE_H || (defined _LOCALE_H && defined __sun))
# define LC_MESSAGES 1729
#endif
/* We define an additional symbol to signal that we use the GNU
implementation of gettext. */
#define __USE_GNU_GETTEXT 1
/* Provide information about the supported file formats. Returns the
maximum minor revision number supported for a given major revision. */
#define __GNU_GETTEXT_SUPPORTED_REVISION(major) \
((major) == 0 ? 1 : -1)
/* Resolve a platform specific conflict on DJGPP. GNU gettext takes
precedence over _conio_gettext. */
#ifdef __DJGPP__
# undef gettext
#endif
/* Use _INTL_PARAMS, not PARAMS, in order to avoid clashes with identifiers
used by programs. Similarly, test __PROTOTYPES, not PROTOTYPES. */
#ifndef _INTL_PARAMS
# if __STDC__ || defined __GNUC__ || defined __SUNPRO_C || defined __cplusplus || __PROTOTYPES
# define _INTL_PARAMS(args) args
# else
# define _INTL_PARAMS(args) ()
# endif
#endif
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif
/* We redirect the functions to those prefixed with "libintl_". This is
necessary, because some systems define gettext/textdomain/... in the C
library (namely, Solaris 2.4 and newer, and GNU libc 2.0 and newer).
If we used the unprefixed names, there would be cases where the
definition in the C library would override the one in the libintl.so
shared library. Recall that on ELF systems, the symbols are looked
up in the following order:
1. in the executable,
2. in the shared libraries specified on the link command line, in order,
3. in the dependencies of the shared libraries specified on the link
command line,
4. in the dlopen()ed shared libraries, in the order in which they were
dlopen()ed.
The definition in the C library would override the one in libintl.so if
either
* -lc is given on the link command line and -lintl isn't, or
* -lc is given on the link command line before -lintl, or
* libintl.so is a dependency of a dlopen()ed shared library but not
linked to the executable at link time.
Since Solaris gettext() behaves differently than GNU gettext(), this
would be unacceptable.
The redirection happens by default through macros in C, so that &gettext
is independent of the compilation unit, but through inline functions in
C++, in order not to interfere with the name mangling of class fields or
class methods called 'gettext'. */
/* The user can define _INTL_REDIRECT_INLINE or _INTL_REDIRECT_MACROS.
If he doesn't, we choose the method. A third possible method is
_INTL_REDIRECT_ASM, supported only by GCC. */
#if !(defined _INTL_REDIRECT_INLINE || defined _INTL_REDIRECT_MACROS)
# if __GNUC__ >= 2 && !defined __APPLE_CC__ && (defined __STDC__ || defined __cplusplus)
# define _INTL_REDIRECT_ASM
# else
# ifdef __cplusplus
# define _INTL_REDIRECT_INLINE
# else
# define _INTL_REDIRECT_MACROS
# endif
# endif
#endif
/* Auxiliary macros. */
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_ASM
# define _INTL_ASM(cname) __asm__ (_INTL_ASMNAME (__USER_LABEL_PREFIX__, #cname))
# define _INTL_ASMNAME(prefix,cnamestring) _INTL_STRINGIFY (prefix) cnamestring
# define _INTL_STRINGIFY(prefix) #prefix
#else
# define _INTL_ASM(cname)
#endif
/* Look up MSGID in the current default message catalog for the current
LC_MESSAGES locale. If not found, returns MSGID itself (the default
text). */
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_INLINE
extern char *libintl_gettext (const char *__msgid);
static inline char *gettext (const char *__msgid)
{
return libintl_gettext (__msgid);
}
#else
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_MACROS
# define gettext libintl_gettext
#endif
extern char *gettext _INTL_PARAMS ((const char *__msgid))
_INTL_ASM (libintl_gettext);
#endif
/* Look up MSGID in the DOMAINNAME message catalog for the current
LC_MESSAGES locale. */
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_INLINE
extern char *libintl_dgettext (const char *__domainname, const char *__msgid);
static inline char *dgettext (const char *__domainname, const char *__msgid)
{
return libintl_dgettext (__domainname, __msgid);
}
#else
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_MACROS
# define dgettext libintl_dgettext
#endif
extern char *dgettext _INTL_PARAMS ((const char *__domainname,
const char *__msgid))
_INTL_ASM (libintl_dgettext);
#endif
/* Look up MSGID in the DOMAINNAME message catalog for the current CATEGORY
locale. */
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_INLINE
extern char *libintl_dcgettext (const char *__domainname, const char *__msgid,
int __category);
static inline char *dcgettext (const char *__domainname, const char *__msgid,
int __category)
{
return libintl_dcgettext (__domainname, __msgid, __category);
}
#else
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_MACROS
# define dcgettext libintl_dcgettext
#endif
extern char *dcgettext _INTL_PARAMS ((const char *__domainname,
const char *__msgid,
int __category))
_INTL_ASM (libintl_dcgettext);
#endif
/* Similar to `gettext' but select the plural form corresponding to the
number N. */
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_INLINE
extern char *libintl_ngettext (const char *__msgid1, const char *__msgid2,
unsigned long int __n);
static inline char *ngettext (const char *__msgid1, const char *__msgid2,
unsigned long int __n)
{
return libintl_ngettext (__msgid1, __msgid2, __n);
}
#else
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_MACROS
# define ngettext libintl_ngettext
#endif
extern char *ngettext _INTL_PARAMS ((const char *__msgid1,
const char *__msgid2,
unsigned long int __n))
_INTL_ASM (libintl_ngettext);
#endif
/* Similar to `dgettext' but select the plural form corresponding to the
number N. */
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_INLINE
extern char *libintl_dngettext (const char *__domainname, const char *__msgid1,
const char *__msgid2, unsigned long int __n);
static inline char *dngettext (const char *__domainname, const char *__msgid1,
const char *__msgid2, unsigned long int __n)
{
return libintl_dngettext (__domainname, __msgid1, __msgid2, __n);
}
#else
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_MACROS
# define dngettext libintl_dngettext
#endif
extern char *dngettext _INTL_PARAMS ((const char *__domainname,
const char *__msgid1,
const char *__msgid2,
unsigned long int __n))
_INTL_ASM (libintl_dngettext);
#endif
/* Similar to `dcgettext' but select the plural form corresponding to the
number N. */
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_INLINE
extern char *libintl_dcngettext (const char *__domainname,
const char *__msgid1, const char *__msgid2,
unsigned long int __n, int __category);
static inline char *dcngettext (const char *__domainname,
const char *__msgid1, const char *__msgid2,
unsigned long int __n, int __category)
{
return libintl_dcngettext (__domainname, __msgid1, __msgid2, __n, __category);
}
#else
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_MACROS
# define dcngettext libintl_dcngettext
#endif
extern char *dcngettext _INTL_PARAMS ((const char *__domainname,
const char *__msgid1,
const char *__msgid2,
unsigned long int __n,
int __category))
_INTL_ASM (libintl_dcngettext);
#endif
/* Set the current default message catalog to DOMAINNAME.
If DOMAINNAME is null, return the current default.
If DOMAINNAME is "", reset to the default of "messages". */
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_INLINE
extern char *libintl_textdomain (const char *__domainname);
static inline char *textdomain (const char *__domainname)
{
return libintl_textdomain (__domainname);
}
#else
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_MACROS
# define textdomain libintl_textdomain
#endif
extern char *textdomain _INTL_PARAMS ((const char *__domainname))
_INTL_ASM (libintl_textdomain);
#endif
/* Specify that the DOMAINNAME message catalog will be found
in DIRNAME rather than in the system locale data base. */
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_INLINE
extern char *libintl_bindtextdomain (const char *__domainname,
const char *__dirname);
static inline char *bindtextdomain (const char *__domainname,
const char *__dirname)
{
return libintl_bindtextdomain (__domainname, __dirname);
}
#else
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_MACROS
# define bindtextdomain libintl_bindtextdomain
#endif
extern char *bindtextdomain _INTL_PARAMS ((const char *__domainname,
const char *__dirname))
_INTL_ASM (libintl_bindtextdomain);
#endif
/* Specify the character encoding in which the messages from the
DOMAINNAME message catalog will be returned. */
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_INLINE
extern char *libintl_bind_textdomain_codeset (const char *__domainname,
const char *__codeset);
static inline char *bind_textdomain_codeset (const char *__domainname,
const char *__codeset)
{
return libintl_bind_textdomain_codeset (__domainname, __codeset);
}
#else
#ifdef _INTL_REDIRECT_MACROS
# define bind_textdomain_codeset libintl_bind_textdomain_codeset
#endif
extern char *bind_textdomain_codeset _INTL_PARAMS ((const char *__domainname,
const char *__codeset))
_INTL_ASM (libintl_bind_textdomain_codeset);
#endif
/* Support for relocatable packages. */
/* Sets the original and the current installation prefix of the package.
Relocation simply replaces a pathname starting with the original prefix
by the corresponding pathname with the current prefix instead. Both
prefixes should be directory names without trailing slash (i.e. use ""
instead of "/"). */
#define libintl_set_relocation_prefix libintl_set_relocation_prefix
extern void
libintl_set_relocation_prefix _INTL_PARAMS ((const char *orig_prefix,
const char *curr_prefix));
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif
#endif /* libintl.h */
lib/intl/loadinfo.h
+156
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
/* Copyright (C) 1996-1999, 2000-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of the GNU C Library.
Contributed by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@cygnus.com>, 1996.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifndef _LOADINFO_H
#define _LOADINFO_H 1
/* Declarations of locale dependent catalog lookup functions.
Implemented in
localealias.c Possibly replace a locale name by another.
explodename.c Split a locale name into its various fields.
l10nflist.c Generate a list of filenames of possible message catalogs.
finddomain.c Find and open the relevant message catalogs.
The main function _nl_find_domain() in finddomain.c is declared
in gettextP.h.
*/
#ifndef PARAMS
# if __STDC__ || defined __GNUC__ || defined __SUNPRO_C || defined __cplusplus || __PROTOTYPES
# define PARAMS(args) args
# else
# define PARAMS(args) ()
# endif
#endif
#ifndef internal_function
# define internal_function
#endif
/* Tell the compiler when a conditional or integer expression is
almost always true or almost always false. */
#ifndef HAVE_BUILTIN_EXPECT
# define __builtin_expect(expr, val) (expr)
#endif
/* Separator in PATH like lists of pathnames. */
#if defined _WIN32 || defined __WIN32__ || defined __EMX__ || defined __DJGPP__
/* Win32, OS/2, DOS */
# define PATH_SEPARATOR ';'
#else
/* Unix */
# define PATH_SEPARATOR ':'
#endif
/* Encoding of locale name parts. */
#define CEN_REVISION 1
#define CEN_SPONSOR 2
#define CEN_SPECIAL 4
#define XPG_NORM_CODESET 8
#define XPG_CODESET 16
#define TERRITORY 32
#define CEN_AUDIENCE 64
#define XPG_MODIFIER 128
#define CEN_SPECIFIC (CEN_REVISION|CEN_SPONSOR|CEN_SPECIAL|CEN_AUDIENCE)
#define XPG_SPECIFIC (XPG_CODESET|XPG_NORM_CODESET|XPG_MODIFIER)
struct loaded_l10nfile
{
const char *filename;
int decided;
const void *data;
struct loaded_l10nfile *next;
struct loaded_l10nfile *successor[1];
};
/* Normalize codeset name. There is no standard for the codeset
names. Normalization allows the user to use any of the common
names. The return value is dynamically allocated and has to be
freed by the caller. */
extern const char *_nl_normalize_codeset PARAMS ((const char *codeset,
size_t name_len));
/* Lookup a locale dependent file.
*L10NFILE_LIST denotes a pool of lookup results of locale dependent
files of the same kind, sorted in decreasing order of ->filename.
DIRLIST and DIRLIST_LEN are an argz list of directories in which to
look, containing at least one directory (i.e. DIRLIST_LEN > 0).
MASK, LANGUAGE, TERRITORY, CODESET, NORMALIZED_CODESET, MODIFIER,
SPECIAL, SPONSOR, REVISION are the pieces of the locale name, as
produced by _nl_explode_name(). FILENAME is the filename suffix.
The return value is the lookup result, either found in *L10NFILE_LIST,
or - if DO_ALLOCATE is nonzero - freshly allocated, or possibly NULL.
If the return value is non-NULL, it is added to *L10NFILE_LIST, and
its ->next field denotes the chaining inside *L10NFILE_LIST, and
furthermore its ->successor[] field contains a list of other lookup
results from which this lookup result inherits. */
extern struct loaded_l10nfile *
_nl_make_l10nflist PARAMS ((struct loaded_l10nfile **l10nfile_list,
const char *dirlist, size_t dirlist_len, int mask,
const char *language, const char *territory,
const char *codeset,
const char *normalized_codeset,
const char *modifier, const char *special,
const char *sponsor, const char *revision,
const char *filename, int do_allocate));
/* Lookup the real locale name for a locale alias NAME, or NULL if
NAME is not a locale alias (but possibly a real locale name).
The return value is statically allocated and must not be freed. */
extern const char *_nl_expand_alias PARAMS ((const char *name));
/* Split a locale name NAME into its pieces: language, modifier,
territory, codeset, special, sponsor, revision.
NAME gets destructively modified: NUL bytes are inserted here and
there. *LANGUAGE gets assigned NAME. Each of *MODIFIER, *TERRITORY,
*CODESET, *SPECIAL, *SPONSOR, *REVISION gets assigned either a
pointer into the old NAME string, or NULL. *NORMALIZED_CODESET
gets assigned the expanded *CODESET, if it is different from *CODESET;
this one is dynamically allocated and has to be freed by the caller.
The return value is a bitmask, where each bit corresponds to one
filled-in value:
XPG_MODIFIER, CEN_AUDIENCE for *MODIFIER,
TERRITORY for *TERRITORY,
XPG_CODESET for *CODESET,
XPG_NORM_CODESET for *NORMALIZED_CODESET,
CEN_SPECIAL for *SPECIAL,
CEN_SPONSOR for *SPONSOR,
CEN_REVISION for *REVISION.
*/
extern int _nl_explode_name PARAMS ((char *name, const char **language,
const char **modifier,
const char **territory,
const char **codeset,
const char **normalized_codeset,
const char **special,
const char **sponsor,
const char **revision));
/* Split a locale name NAME into a leading language part and all the
rest. Return a pointer to the first character after the language,
i.e. to the first byte of the rest. */
extern char *_nl_find_language PARAMS ((const char *name));
#endif /* loadinfo.h */
lib/intl/loadmsgcat.c
+1322
View File
File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff
lib/intl/localcharset.c
+398
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,398 @@
/* Determine a canonical name for the current locale's character encoding.
Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
/* Written by Bruno Haible <bruno@clisp.org>. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
/* Specification. */
#include "localcharset.h"
#if HAVE_STDDEF_H
# include <stddef.h>
#endif
#include <stdio.h>
#if HAVE_STRING_H
# include <string.h>
#else
# include <strings.h>
#endif
#if HAVE_STDLIB_H
# include <stdlib.h>
#endif
#if defined _WIN32 || defined __WIN32__
# undef WIN32 /* avoid warning on mingw32 */
# define WIN32
#endif
#if defined __EMX__
/* Assume EMX program runs on OS/2, even if compiled under DOS. */
# define OS2
#endif
#if !defined WIN32
# if HAVE_LANGINFO_CODESET
# include <langinfo.h>
# else
# if HAVE_SETLOCALE
# include <locale.h>
# endif
# endif
#elif defined WIN32
# define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
# include <windows.h>
#endif
#if defined OS2
# define INCL_DOS
# include <os2.h>
#endif
#if ENABLE_RELOCATABLE
# include "relocatable.h"
#else
# define relocate(pathname) (pathname)
#endif
#if defined _WIN32 || defined __WIN32__ || defined __EMX__ || defined __DJGPP__
/* Win32, OS/2, DOS */
# define ISSLASH(C) ((C) == '/' || (C) == '\\')
#endif
#ifndef DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR
# define DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR '/'
#endif
#ifndef ISSLASH
# define ISSLASH(C) ((C) == DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR)
#endif
#ifdef HAVE_GETC_UNLOCKED
# undef getc
# define getc getc_unlocked
#endif
/* The following static variable is declared 'volatile' to avoid a
possible multithread problem in the function get_charset_aliases. If we
are running in a threaded environment, and if two threads initialize
'charset_aliases' simultaneously, both will produce the same value,
and everything will be ok if the two assignments to 'charset_aliases'
are atomic. But I don't know what will happen if the two assignments mix. */
#if __STDC__ != 1
# define volatile /* empty */
#endif
/* Pointer to the contents of the charset.alias file, if it has already been
read, else NULL. Its format is:
ALIAS_1 '\0' CANONICAL_1 '\0' ... ALIAS_n '\0' CANONICAL_n '\0' '\0' */
static const char * volatile charset_aliases;
/* Return a pointer to the contents of the charset.alias file. */
static const char *
get_charset_aliases ()
{
const char *cp;
cp = charset_aliases;
if (cp == NULL)
{
#if !(defined VMS || defined WIN32)
FILE *fp;
const char *dir = relocate (LIBDIR);
const char *base = "charset.alias";
char *file_name;
/* Concatenate dir and base into freshly allocated file_name. */
{
size_t dir_len = strlen (dir);
size_t base_len = strlen (base);
int add_slash = (dir_len > 0 && !ISSLASH (dir[dir_len - 1]));
file_name = (char *) malloc (dir_len + add_slash + base_len + 1);
if (file_name != NULL)
{
memcpy (file_name, dir, dir_len);
if (add_slash)
file_name[dir_len] = DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR;
memcpy (file_name + dir_len + add_slash, base, base_len + 1);
}
}
if (file_name == NULL || (fp = fopen (file_name, "r")) == NULL)
/* Out of memory or file not found, treat it as empty. */
cp = "";
else
{
/* Parse the file's contents. */
int c;
char buf1[50+1];
char buf2[50+1];
char *res_ptr = NULL;
size_t res_size = 0;
size_t l1, l2;
for (;;)
{
c = getc (fp);
if (c == EOF)
break;
if (c == '\n' || c == ' ' || c == '\t')
continue;
if (c == '#')
{
/* Skip comment, to end of line. */
do
c = getc (fp);
while (!(c == EOF || c == '\n'));
if (c == EOF)
break;
continue;
}
ungetc (c, fp);
if (fscanf (fp, "%50s %50s", buf1, buf2) < 2)
break;
l1 = strlen (buf1);
l2 = strlen (buf2);
if (res_size == 0)
{
res_size = l1 + 1 + l2 + 1;
res_ptr = (char *) malloc (res_size + 1);
}
else
{
res_size += l1 + 1 + l2 + 1;
res_ptr = (char *) realloc (res_ptr, res_size + 1);
}
if (res_ptr == NULL)
{
/* Out of memory. */
res_size = 0;
break;
}
strcpy (res_ptr + res_size - (l2 + 1) - (l1 + 1), buf1);
strcpy (res_ptr + res_size - (l2 + 1), buf2);
}
fclose (fp);
if (res_size == 0)
cp = "";
else
{
*(res_ptr + res_size) = '\0';
cp = res_ptr;
}
}
if (file_name != NULL)
free (file_name);
#else
# if defined VMS
/* To avoid the troubles of an extra file charset.alias_vms in the
sources of many GNU packages, simply inline the aliases here. */
/* The list of encodings is taken from the OpenVMS 7.3-1 documentation
"Compaq C Run-Time Library Reference Manual for OpenVMS systems"
section 10.7 "Handling Different Character Sets". */
cp = "ISO8859-1" "\0" "ISO-8859-1" "\0"
"ISO8859-2" "\0" "ISO-8859-2" "\0"
"ISO8859-5" "\0" "ISO-8859-5" "\0"
"ISO8859-7" "\0" "ISO-8859-7" "\0"
"ISO8859-8" "\0" "ISO-8859-8" "\0"
"ISO8859-9" "\0" "ISO-8859-9" "\0"
/* Japanese */
"eucJP" "\0" "EUC-JP" "\0"
"SJIS" "\0" "SHIFT_JIS" "\0"
"DECKANJI" "\0" "DEC-KANJI" "\0"
"SDECKANJI" "\0" "EUC-JP" "\0"
/* Chinese */
"eucTW" "\0" "EUC-TW" "\0"
"DECHANYU" "\0" "DEC-HANYU" "\0"
"DECHANZI" "\0" "GB2312" "\0"
/* Korean */
"DECKOREAN" "\0" "EUC-KR" "\0";
# endif
# if defined WIN32
/* To avoid the troubles of installing a separate file in the same
directory as the DLL and of retrieving the DLL's directory at
runtime, simply inline the aliases here. */
cp = "CP936" "\0" "GBK" "\0"
"CP1361" "\0" "JOHAB" "\0"
"CP20127" "\0" "ASCII" "\0"
"CP20866" "\0" "KOI8-R" "\0"
"CP21866" "\0" "KOI8-RU" "\0"
"CP28591" "\0" "ISO-8859-1" "\0"
"CP28592" "\0" "ISO-8859-2" "\0"
"CP28593" "\0" "ISO-8859-3" "\0"
"CP28594" "\0" "ISO-8859-4" "\0"
"CP28595" "\0" "ISO-8859-5" "\0"
"CP28596" "\0" "ISO-8859-6" "\0"
"CP28597" "\0" "ISO-8859-7" "\0"
"CP28598" "\0" "ISO-8859-8" "\0"
"CP28599" "\0" "ISO-8859-9" "\0"
"CP28605" "\0" "ISO-8859-15" "\0";
# endif
#endif
charset_aliases = cp;
}
return cp;
}
/* Determine the current locale's character encoding, and canonicalize it
into one of the canonical names listed in config.charset.
The result must not be freed; it is statically allocated.
If the canonical name cannot be determined, the result is a non-canonical
name. */
#ifdef STATIC
STATIC
#endif
const char *
locale_charset ()
{
const char *codeset;
const char *aliases;
#if !(defined WIN32 || defined OS2)
# if HAVE_LANGINFO_CODESET
/* Most systems support nl_langinfo (CODESET) nowadays. */
codeset = nl_langinfo (CODESET);
# else
/* On old systems which lack it, use setlocale or getenv. */
const char *locale = NULL;
/* But most old systems don't have a complete set of locales. Some
(like SunOS 4 or DJGPP) have only the C locale. Therefore we don't
use setlocale here; it would return "C" when it doesn't support the
locale name the user has set. */
# if HAVE_SETLOCALE && 0
locale = setlocale (LC_CTYPE, NULL);
# endif
if (locale == NULL || locale[0] == '\0')
{
locale = getenv ("LC_ALL");
if (locale == NULL || locale[0] == '\0')
{
locale = getenv ("LC_CTYPE");
if (locale == NULL || locale[0] == '\0')
locale = getenv ("LANG");
}
}
/* On some old systems, one used to set locale = "iso8859_1". On others,
you set it to "language_COUNTRY.charset". In any case, we resolve it
through the charset.alias file. */
codeset = locale;
# endif
#elif defined WIN32
static char buf[2 + 10 + 1];
/* Woe32 has a function returning the locale's codepage as a number. */
sprintf (buf, "CP%u", GetACP ());
codeset = buf;
#elif defined OS2
const char *locale;
static char buf[2 + 10 + 1];
ULONG cp[3];
ULONG cplen;
/* Allow user to override the codeset, as set in the operating system,
with standard language environment variables. */
locale = getenv ("LC_ALL");
if (locale == NULL || locale[0] == '\0')
{
locale = getenv ("LC_CTYPE");
if (locale == NULL || locale[0] == '\0')
locale = getenv ("LANG");
}
if (locale != NULL && locale[0] != '\0')
{
/* If the locale name contains an encoding after the dot, return it. */
const char *dot = strchr (locale, '.');
if (dot != NULL)
{
const char *modifier;
dot++;
/* Look for the possible @... trailer and remove it, if any. */
modifier = strchr (dot, '@');
if (modifier == NULL)
return dot;
if (modifier - dot < sizeof (buf))
{
memcpy (buf, dot, modifier - dot);
buf [modifier - dot] = '\0';
return buf;
}
}
/* Resolve through the charset.alias file. */
codeset = locale;
}
else
{
/* OS/2 has a function returning the locale's codepage as a number. */
if (DosQueryCp (sizeof (cp), cp, &cplen))
codeset = "";
else
{
sprintf (buf, "CP%u", cp[0]);
codeset = buf;
}
}
#endif
if (codeset == NULL)
/* The canonical name cannot be determined. */
codeset = "";
/* Resolve alias. */
for (aliases = get_charset_aliases ();
*aliases != '\0';
aliases += strlen (aliases) + 1, aliases += strlen (aliases) + 1)
if (strcmp (codeset, aliases) == 0
|| (aliases[0] == '*' && aliases[1] == '\0'))
{
codeset = aliases + strlen (aliases) + 1;
break;
}
/* Don't return an empty string. GNU libc and GNU libiconv interpret
the empty string as denoting "the locale's character encoding",
thus GNU libiconv would call this function a second time. */
if (codeset[0] == '\0')
codeset = "ASCII";
return codeset;
}
lib/intl/localcharset.h
+42
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
/* Determine a canonical name for the current locale's character encoding.
Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of the GNU CHARSET Library.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifndef _LOCALCHARSET_H
#define _LOCALCHARSET_H
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif
/* Determine the current locale's character encoding, and canonicalize it
into one of the canonical names listed in config.charset.
The result must not be freed; it is statically allocated.
If the canonical name cannot be determined, the result is a non-canonical
name. */
extern const char * locale_charset (void);
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif
#endif /* _LOCALCHARSET_H */
lib/intl/locale.alias
+78
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
# Locale name alias data base.
# Copyright (C) 1996,1997,1998,1999,2000,2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
#
# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
# under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
# by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
# any later version.
#
# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
# Library General Public License for more details.
#
# You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
# License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
# USA.
# The format of this file is the same as for the corresponding file of
# the X Window System, which normally can be found in
# /usr/lib/X11/locale/locale.alias
# A single line contains two fields: an alias and a substitution value.
# All entries are case independent.
# Note: This file is far from being complete. If you have a value for
# your own site which you think might be useful for others too, share
# it with the rest of us. Send it using the `glibcbug' script to
# bugs@gnu.org.
# Packages using this file:
bokmal no_NO.ISO-8859-1
bokmål no_NO.ISO-8859-1
catalan ca_ES.ISO-8859-1
croatian hr_HR.ISO-8859-2
czech cs_CZ.ISO-8859-2
danish da_DK.ISO-8859-1
dansk da_DK.ISO-8859-1
deutsch de_DE.ISO-8859-1
dutch nl_NL.ISO-8859-1
eesti et_EE.ISO-8859-1
estonian et_EE.ISO-8859-1
finnish fi_FI.ISO-8859-1
français fr_FR.ISO-8859-1
french fr_FR.ISO-8859-1
galego gl_ES.ISO-8859-1
galician gl_ES.ISO-8859-1
german de_DE.ISO-8859-1
greek el_GR.ISO-8859-7
hebrew he_IL.ISO-8859-8
hrvatski hr_HR.ISO-8859-2
hungarian hu_HU.ISO-8859-2
icelandic is_IS.ISO-8859-1
italian it_IT.ISO-8859-1
japanese ja_JP.eucJP
japanese.euc ja_JP.eucJP
ja_JP ja_JP.eucJP
ja_JP.ujis ja_JP.eucJP
japanese.sjis ja_JP.SJIS
korean ko_KR.eucKR
korean.euc ko_KR.eucKR
ko_KR ko_KR.eucKR
lithuanian lt_LT.ISO-8859-13
nb_NO no_NO.ISO-8859-1
nb_NO.ISO-8859-1 no_NO.ISO-8859-1
norwegian no_NO.ISO-8859-1
nynorsk nn_NO.ISO-8859-1
polish pl_PL.ISO-8859-2
portuguese pt_PT.ISO-8859-1
romanian ro_RO.ISO-8859-2
russian ru_RU.ISO-8859-5
slovak sk_SK.ISO-8859-2
slovene sl_SI.ISO-8859-2
slovenian sl_SI.ISO-8859-2
spanish es_ES.ISO-8859-1
swedish sv_SE.ISO-8859-1
thai th_TH.TIS-620
turkish tr_TR.ISO-8859-9
lib/intl/localealias.c
+419
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,419 @@
/* Handle aliases for locale names.
Copyright (C) 1995-1999, 2000-2001, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
/* Tell glibc's <string.h> to provide a prototype for mempcpy().
This must come before <config.h> because <config.h> may include
<features.h>, and once <features.h> has been included, it's too late. */
#ifndef _GNU_SOURCE
# define _GNU_SOURCE 1
#endif
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <ctype.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#if defined _LIBC || defined HAVE___FSETLOCKING
# include <stdio_ext.h>
#endif
#include <sys/types.h>
#ifdef __GNUC__
# undef alloca
# define alloca __builtin_alloca
# define HAVE_ALLOCA 1
#else
# ifdef _MSC_VER
# include <malloc.h>
# define alloca _alloca
# else
# if defined HAVE_ALLOCA_H || defined _LIBC
# include <alloca.h>
# else
# ifdef _AIX
#pragma alloca
# else
# ifndef alloca
char *alloca ();
# endif
# endif
# endif
# endif
#endif
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "gettextP.h"
#if ENABLE_RELOCATABLE
# include "relocatable.h"
#else
# define relocate(pathname) (pathname)
#endif
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
#ifdef _LIBC
/* Rename the non ANSI C functions. This is required by the standard
because some ANSI C functions will require linking with this object
file and the name space must not be polluted. */
# define strcasecmp __strcasecmp
# ifndef mempcpy
# define mempcpy __mempcpy
# endif
# define HAVE_MEMPCPY 1
# define HAVE___FSETLOCKING 1
/* We need locking here since we can be called from different places. */
# include <bits/libc-lock.h>
__libc_lock_define_initialized (static, lock);
#endif
#ifndef internal_function
# define internal_function
#endif
/* Some optimizations for glibc. */
#ifdef _LIBC
# define FEOF(fp) feof_unlocked (fp)
# define FGETS(buf, n, fp) fgets_unlocked (buf, n, fp)
#else
# define FEOF(fp) feof (fp)
# define FGETS(buf, n, fp) fgets (buf, n, fp)
#endif
/* For those losing systems which don't have `alloca' we have to add
some additional code emulating it. */
#ifdef HAVE_ALLOCA
# define freea(p) /* nothing */
#else
# define alloca(n) malloc (n)
# define freea(p) free (p)
#endif
#if defined _LIBC_REENTRANT || defined HAVE_FGETS_UNLOCKED
# undef fgets
# define fgets(buf, len, s) fgets_unlocked (buf, len, s)
#endif
#if defined _LIBC_REENTRANT || defined HAVE_FEOF_UNLOCKED
# undef feof
# define feof(s) feof_unlocked (s)
#endif
struct alias_map
{
const char *alias;
const char *value;
};
#ifndef _LIBC
# define libc_freeres_ptr(decl) decl
#endif
libc_freeres_ptr (static char *string_space);
static size_t string_space_act;
static size_t string_space_max;
libc_freeres_ptr (static struct alias_map *map);
static size_t nmap;
static size_t maxmap;
/* Prototypes for local functions. */
static size_t read_alias_file PARAMS ((const char *fname, int fname_len))
internal_function;
static int extend_alias_table PARAMS ((void));
static int alias_compare PARAMS ((const struct alias_map *map1,
const struct alias_map *map2));
const char *
_nl_expand_alias (name)
const char *name;
{
static const char *locale_alias_path;
struct alias_map *retval;
const char *result = NULL;
size_t added;
#ifdef _LIBC
__libc_lock_lock (lock);
#endif
if (locale_alias_path == NULL)
locale_alias_path = LOCALE_ALIAS_PATH;
do
{
struct alias_map item;
item.alias = name;
if (nmap > 0)
retval = (struct alias_map *) bsearch (&item, map, nmap,
sizeof (struct alias_map),
(int (*) PARAMS ((const void *,
const void *))
) alias_compare);
else
retval = NULL;
/* We really found an alias. Return the value. */
if (retval != NULL)
{
result = retval->value;
break;
}
/* Perhaps we can find another alias file. */
added = 0;
while (added == 0 && locale_alias_path[0] != '\0')
{
const char *start;
while (locale_alias_path[0] == PATH_SEPARATOR)
++locale_alias_path;
start = locale_alias_path;
while (locale_alias_path[0] != '\0'
&& locale_alias_path[0] != PATH_SEPARATOR)
++locale_alias_path;
if (start < locale_alias_path)
added = read_alias_file (start, locale_alias_path - start);
}
}
while (added != 0);
#ifdef _LIBC
__libc_lock_unlock (lock);
#endif
return result;
}
static size_t
internal_function
read_alias_file (fname, fname_len)
const char *fname;
int fname_len;
{
FILE *fp;
char *full_fname;
size_t added;
static const char aliasfile[] = "/locale.alias";
full_fname = (char *) alloca (fname_len + sizeof aliasfile);
#ifdef HAVE_MEMPCPY
mempcpy (mempcpy (full_fname, fname, fname_len),
aliasfile, sizeof aliasfile);
#else
memcpy (full_fname, fname, fname_len);
memcpy (&full_fname[fname_len], aliasfile, sizeof aliasfile);
#endif
fp = fopen (relocate (full_fname), "r");
freea (full_fname);
if (fp == NULL)
return 0;
#ifdef HAVE___FSETLOCKING
/* No threads present. */
__fsetlocking (fp, FSETLOCKING_BYCALLER);
#endif
added = 0;
while (!FEOF (fp))
{
/* It is a reasonable approach to use a fix buffer here because
a) we are only interested in the first two fields
b) these fields must be usable as file names and so must not
be that long
We avoid a multi-kilobyte buffer here since this would use up
stack space which we might not have if the program ran out of
memory. */
char buf[400];
char *alias;
char *value;
char *cp;
if (FGETS (buf, sizeof buf, fp) == NULL)
/* EOF reached. */
break;
cp = buf;
/* Ignore leading white space. */
while (isspace ((unsigned char) cp[0]))
++cp;
/* A leading '#' signals a comment line. */
if (cp[0] != '\0' && cp[0] != '#')
{
alias = cp++;
while (cp[0] != '\0' && !isspace ((unsigned char) cp[0]))
++cp;
/* Terminate alias name. */
if (cp[0] != '\0')
*cp++ = '\0';
/* Now look for the beginning of the value. */
while (isspace ((unsigned char) cp[0]))
++cp;
if (cp[0] != '\0')
{
size_t alias_len;
size_t value_len;
value = cp++;
while (cp[0] != '\0' && !isspace ((unsigned char) cp[0]))
++cp;
/* Terminate value. */
if (cp[0] == '\n')
{
/* This has to be done to make the following test
for the end of line possible. We are looking for
the terminating '\n' which do not overwrite here. */
*cp++ = '\0';
*cp = '\n';
}
else if (cp[0] != '\0')
*cp++ = '\0';
if (nmap >= maxmap)
if (__builtin_expect (extend_alias_table (), 0))
return added;
alias_len = strlen (alias) + 1;
value_len = strlen (value) + 1;
if (string_space_act + alias_len + value_len > string_space_max)
{
/* Increase size of memory pool. */
size_t new_size = (string_space_max
+ (alias_len + value_len > 1024
? alias_len + value_len : 1024));
char *new_pool = (char *) realloc (string_space, new_size);
if (new_pool == NULL)
return added;
if (__builtin_expect (string_space != new_pool, 0))
{
size_t i;
for (i = 0; i < nmap; i++)
{
map[i].alias += new_pool - string_space;
map[i].value += new_pool - string_space;
}
}
string_space = new_pool;
string_space_max = new_size;
}
map[nmap].alias = memcpy (&string_space[string_space_act],
alias, alias_len);
string_space_act += alias_len;
map[nmap].value = memcpy (&string_space[string_space_act],
value, value_len);
string_space_act += value_len;
++nmap;
++added;
}
}
/* Possibly not the whole line fits into the buffer. Ignore
the rest of the line. */
while (strchr (buf, '\n') == NULL)
if (FGETS (buf, sizeof buf, fp) == NULL)
/* Make sure the inner loop will be left. The outer loop
will exit at the `feof' test. */
break;
}
/* Should we test for ferror()? I think we have to silently ignore
errors. --drepper */
fclose (fp);
if (added > 0)
qsort (map, nmap, sizeof (struct alias_map),
(int (*) PARAMS ((const void *, const void *))) alias_compare);
return added;
}
static int
extend_alias_table ()
{
size_t new_size;
struct alias_map *new_map;
new_size = maxmap == 0 ? 100 : 2 * maxmap;
new_map = (struct alias_map *) realloc (map, (new_size
* sizeof (struct alias_map)));
if (new_map == NULL)
/* Simply don't extend: we don't have any more core. */
return -1;
map = new_map;
maxmap = new_size;
return 0;
}
static int
alias_compare (map1, map2)
const struct alias_map *map1;
const struct alias_map *map2;
{
#if defined _LIBC || defined HAVE_STRCASECMP
return strcasecmp (map1->alias, map2->alias);
#else
const unsigned char *p1 = (const unsigned char *) map1->alias;
const unsigned char *p2 = (const unsigned char *) map2->alias;
unsigned char c1, c2;
if (p1 == p2)
return 0;
do
{
/* I know this seems to be odd but the tolower() function in
some systems libc cannot handle nonalpha characters. */
c1 = isupper (*p1) ? tolower (*p1) : *p1;
c2 = isupper (*p2) ? tolower (*p2) : *p2;
if (c1 == '\0')
break;
++p1;
++p2;
}
while (c1 == c2);
return c1 - c2;
#endif
}
lib/intl/localename.c
+772
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,772 @@
/* Determine the current selected locale.
Copyright (C) 1995-1999, 2000-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
/* Written by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@gnu.org>, 1995. */
/* Win32 code written by Tor Lillqvist <tml@iki.fi>. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <locale.h>
#if defined _WIN32 || defined __WIN32__
# undef WIN32 /* avoid warning on mingw32 */
# define WIN32
#endif
#ifdef WIN32
# define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
# include <windows.h>
/* Mingw headers don't have latest language and sublanguage codes. */
# ifndef LANG_AFRIKAANS
# define LANG_AFRIKAANS 0x36
# endif
# ifndef LANG_ALBANIAN
# define LANG_ALBANIAN 0x1c
# endif
# ifndef LANG_ARABIC
# define LANG_ARABIC 0x01
# endif
# ifndef LANG_ARMENIAN
# define LANG_ARMENIAN 0x2b
# endif
# ifndef LANG_ASSAMESE
# define LANG_ASSAMESE 0x4d
# endif
# ifndef LANG_AZERI
# define LANG_AZERI 0x2c
# endif
# ifndef LANG_BASQUE
# define LANG_BASQUE 0x2d
# endif
# ifndef LANG_BELARUSIAN
# define LANG_BELARUSIAN 0x23
# endif
# ifndef LANG_BENGALI
# define LANG_BENGALI 0x45
# endif
# ifndef LANG_CATALAN
# define LANG_CATALAN 0x03
# endif
# ifndef LANG_DIVEHI
# define LANG_DIVEHI 0x65
# endif
# ifndef LANG_ESTONIAN
# define LANG_ESTONIAN 0x25
# endif
# ifndef LANG_FAEROESE
# define LANG_FAEROESE 0x38
# endif
# ifndef LANG_FARSI
# define LANG_FARSI 0x29
# endif
# ifndef LANG_GALICIAN
# define LANG_GALICIAN 0x56
# endif
# ifndef LANG_GEORGIAN
# define LANG_GEORGIAN 0x37
# endif
# ifndef LANG_GUJARATI
# define LANG_GUJARATI 0x47
# endif
# ifndef LANG_HEBREW
# define LANG_HEBREW 0x0d
# endif
# ifndef LANG_HINDI
# define LANG_HINDI 0x39
# endif
# ifndef LANG_INDONESIAN
# define LANG_INDONESIAN 0x21
# endif
# ifndef LANG_KANNADA
# define LANG_KANNADA 0x4b
# endif
# ifndef LANG_KASHMIRI
# define LANG_KASHMIRI 0x60
# endif
# ifndef LANG_KAZAK
# define LANG_KAZAK 0x3f
# endif
# ifndef LANG_KONKANI
# define LANG_KONKANI 0x57
# endif
# ifndef LANG_KYRGYZ
# define LANG_KYRGYZ 0x40
# endif
# ifndef LANG_LATVIAN
# define LANG_LATVIAN 0x26
# endif
# ifndef LANG_LITHUANIAN
# define LANG_LITHUANIAN 0x27
# endif
# ifndef LANG_MACEDONIAN
# define LANG_MACEDONIAN 0x2f
# endif
# ifndef LANG_MALAY
# define LANG_MALAY 0x3e
# endif
# ifndef LANG_MALAYALAM
# define LANG_MALAYALAM 0x4c
# endif
# ifndef LANG_MANIPURI
# define LANG_MANIPURI 0x58
# endif
# ifndef LANG_MARATHI
# define LANG_MARATHI 0x4e
# endif
# ifndef LANG_MONGOLIAN
# define LANG_MONGOLIAN 0x50
# endif
# ifndef LANG_NEPALI
# define LANG_NEPALI 0x61
# endif
# ifndef LANG_ORIYA
# define LANG_ORIYA 0x48
# endif
# ifndef LANG_PUNJABI
# define LANG_PUNJABI 0x46
# endif
# ifndef LANG_SANSKRIT
# define LANG_SANSKRIT 0x4f
# endif
# ifndef LANG_SERBIAN
# define LANG_SERBIAN 0x1a
# endif
# ifndef LANG_SINDHI
# define LANG_SINDHI 0x59
# endif
# ifndef LANG_SLOVAK
# define LANG_SLOVAK 0x1b
# endif
# ifndef LANG_SORBIAN
# define LANG_SORBIAN 0x2e
# endif
# ifndef LANG_SWAHILI
# define LANG_SWAHILI 0x41
# endif
# ifndef LANG_SYRIAC
# define LANG_SYRIAC 0x5a
# endif
# ifndef LANG_TAMIL
# define LANG_TAMIL 0x49
# endif
# ifndef LANG_TATAR
# define LANG_TATAR 0x44
# endif
# ifndef LANG_TELUGU
# define LANG_TELUGU 0x4a
# endif
# ifndef LANG_THAI
# define LANG_THAI 0x1e
# endif
# ifndef LANG_UKRAINIAN
# define LANG_UKRAINIAN 0x22
# endif
# ifndef LANG_URDU
# define LANG_URDU 0x20
# endif
# ifndef LANG_UZBEK
# define LANG_UZBEK 0x43
# endif
# ifndef LANG_VIETNAMESE
# define LANG_VIETNAMESE 0x2a
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_SAUDI_ARABIA
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_SAUDI_ARABIA 0x01
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_IRAQ
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_IRAQ 0x02
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_EGYPT
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_EGYPT 0x03
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_LIBYA
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_LIBYA 0x04
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_ALGERIA
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_ALGERIA 0x05
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_MOROCCO
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_MOROCCO 0x06
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_TUNISIA
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_TUNISIA 0x07
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_OMAN
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_OMAN 0x08
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_YEMEN
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_YEMEN 0x09
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_SYRIA
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_SYRIA 0x0a
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_JORDAN
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_JORDAN 0x0b
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_LEBANON
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_LEBANON 0x0c
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_KUWAIT
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_KUWAIT 0x0d
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_UAE
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_UAE 0x0e
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_BAHRAIN
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_BAHRAIN 0x0f
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ARABIC_QATAR
# define SUBLANG_ARABIC_QATAR 0x10
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_AZERI_LATIN
# define SUBLANG_AZERI_LATIN 0x01
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_AZERI_CYRILLIC
# define SUBLANG_AZERI_CYRILLIC 0x02
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_CHINESE_MACAU
# define SUBLANG_CHINESE_MACAU 0x05
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ENGLISH_SOUTH_AFRICA
# define SUBLANG_ENGLISH_SOUTH_AFRICA 0x07
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ENGLISH_JAMAICA
# define SUBLANG_ENGLISH_JAMAICA 0x08
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ENGLISH_CARIBBEAN
# define SUBLANG_ENGLISH_CARIBBEAN 0x09
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ENGLISH_BELIZE
# define SUBLANG_ENGLISH_BELIZE 0x0a
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ENGLISH_TRINIDAD
# define SUBLANG_ENGLISH_TRINIDAD 0x0b
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ENGLISH_ZIMBABWE
# define SUBLANG_ENGLISH_ZIMBABWE 0x0c
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_ENGLISH_PHILIPPINES
# define SUBLANG_ENGLISH_PHILIPPINES 0x0d
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_FRENCH_LUXEMBOURG
# define SUBLANG_FRENCH_LUXEMBOURG 0x05
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_FRENCH_MONACO
# define SUBLANG_FRENCH_MONACO 0x06
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_GERMAN_LUXEMBOURG
# define SUBLANG_GERMAN_LUXEMBOURG 0x04
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_GERMAN_LIECHTENSTEIN
# define SUBLANG_GERMAN_LIECHTENSTEIN 0x05
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_KASHMIRI_INDIA
# define SUBLANG_KASHMIRI_INDIA 0x02
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_MALAY_MALAYSIA
# define SUBLANG_MALAY_MALAYSIA 0x01
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_MALAY_BRUNEI_DARUSSALAM
# define SUBLANG_MALAY_BRUNEI_DARUSSALAM 0x02
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_NEPALI_INDIA
# define SUBLANG_NEPALI_INDIA 0x02
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SERBIAN_LATIN
# define SUBLANG_SERBIAN_LATIN 0x02
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SERBIAN_CYRILLIC
# define SUBLANG_SERBIAN_CYRILLIC 0x03
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_GUATEMALA
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_GUATEMALA 0x04
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_COSTA_RICA
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_COSTA_RICA 0x05
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_PANAMA
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_PANAMA 0x06
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_DOMINICAN_REPUBLIC
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_DOMINICAN_REPUBLIC 0x07
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_VENEZUELA
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_VENEZUELA 0x08
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_COLOMBIA
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_COLOMBIA 0x09
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_PERU
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_PERU 0x0a
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_ARGENTINA
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_ARGENTINA 0x0b
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_ECUADOR
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_ECUADOR 0x0c
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_CHILE
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_CHILE 0x0d
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_URUGUAY
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_URUGUAY 0x0e
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_PARAGUAY
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_PARAGUAY 0x0f
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_BOLIVIA
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_BOLIVIA 0x10
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_EL_SALVADOR
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_EL_SALVADOR 0x11
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_HONDURAS
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_HONDURAS 0x12
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_NICARAGUA
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_NICARAGUA 0x13
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SPANISH_PUERTO_RICO
# define SUBLANG_SPANISH_PUERTO_RICO 0x14
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_SWEDISH_FINLAND
# define SUBLANG_SWEDISH_FINLAND 0x02
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_URDU_PAKISTAN
# define SUBLANG_URDU_PAKISTAN 0x01
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_URDU_INDIA
# define SUBLANG_URDU_INDIA 0x02
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_UZBEK_LATIN
# define SUBLANG_UZBEK_LATIN 0x01
# endif
# ifndef SUBLANG_UZBEK_CYRILLIC
# define SUBLANG_UZBEK_CYRILLIC 0x02
# endif
#endif
/* XPG3 defines the result of 'setlocale (category, NULL)' as:
"Directs 'setlocale()' to query 'category' and return the current
setting of 'local'."
However it does not specify the exact format. Neither do SUSV2 and
ISO C 99. So we can use this feature only on selected systems (e.g.
those using GNU C Library). */
#if defined _LIBC || (defined __GNU_LIBRARY__ && __GNU_LIBRARY__ >= 2)
# define HAVE_LOCALE_NULL
#endif
/* Determine the current locale's name, and canonicalize it into XPG syntax
language[_territory[.codeset]][@modifier]
The codeset part in the result is not reliable; the locale_charset()
should be used for codeset information instead.
The result must not be freed; it is statically allocated. */
const char *
_nl_locale_name (category, categoryname)
int category;
const char *categoryname;
{
const char *retval;
#ifndef WIN32
/* Use the POSIX methods of looking to 'LC_ALL', 'LC_xxx', and 'LANG'.
On some systems this can be done by the 'setlocale' function itself. */
# if defined HAVE_SETLOCALE && defined HAVE_LC_MESSAGES && defined HAVE_LOCALE_NULL
retval = setlocale (category, NULL);
# else
/* Setting of LC_ALL overwrites all other. */
retval = getenv ("LC_ALL");
if (retval == NULL || retval[0] == '\0')
{
/* Next comes the name of the desired category. */
retval = getenv (categoryname);
if (retval == NULL || retval[0] == '\0')
{
/* Last possibility is the LANG environment variable. */
retval = getenv ("LANG");
if (retval == NULL || retval[0] == '\0')
/* We use C as the default domain. POSIX says this is
implementation defined. */
retval = "C";
}
}
# endif
return retval;
#else /* WIN32 */
/* Return an XPG style locale name language[_territory][@modifier].
Don't even bother determining the codeset; it's not useful in this
context, because message catalogs are not specific to a single
codeset. */
LCID lcid;
LANGID langid;
int primary, sub;
/* Let the user override the system settings through environment
variables, as on POSIX systems. */
retval = getenv ("LC_ALL");
if (retval != NULL && retval[0] != '\0')
return retval;
retval = getenv (categoryname);
if (retval != NULL && retval[0] != '\0')
return retval;
retval = getenv ("LANG");
if (retval != NULL && retval[0] != '\0')
return retval;
/* Use native Win32 API locale ID. */
lcid = GetThreadLocale ();
/* Strip off the sorting rules, keep only the language part. */
langid = LANGIDFROMLCID (lcid);
/* Split into language and territory part. */
primary = PRIMARYLANGID (langid);
sub = SUBLANGID (langid);
/* Dispatch on language.
See also http://www.unicode.org/unicode/onlinedat/languages.html .
For details about languages, see http://www.ethnologue.com/ . */
switch (primary)
{
case LANG_AFRIKAANS: return "af_ZA";
case LANG_ALBANIAN: return "sq_AL";
case 0x5e: /* AMHARIC */ return "am_ET";
case LANG_ARABIC:
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_SAUDI_ARABIA: return "ar_SA";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_IRAQ: return "ar_IQ";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_EGYPT: return "ar_EG";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_LIBYA: return "ar_LY";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_ALGERIA: return "ar_DZ";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_MOROCCO: return "ar_MA";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_TUNISIA: return "ar_TN";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_OMAN: return "ar_OM";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_YEMEN: return "ar_YE";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_SYRIA: return "ar_SY";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_JORDAN: return "ar_JO";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_LEBANON: return "ar_LB";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_KUWAIT: return "ar_KW";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_UAE: return "ar_AE";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_BAHRAIN: return "ar_BH";
case SUBLANG_ARABIC_QATAR: return "ar_QA";
}
return "ar";
case LANG_ARMENIAN: return "hy_AM";
case LANG_ASSAMESE: return "as_IN";
case LANG_AZERI:
switch (sub)
{
/* FIXME: Adjust this when Azerbaijani locales appear on Unix. */
case SUBLANG_AZERI_LATIN: return "az_AZ@latin";
case SUBLANG_AZERI_CYRILLIC: return "az_AZ@cyrillic";
}
return "az";
case LANG_BASQUE:
return "eu"; /* Ambiguous: could be "eu_ES" or "eu_FR". */
case LANG_BELARUSIAN: return "be_BY";
case LANG_BENGALI: return "bn_IN";
case LANG_BULGARIAN: return "bg_BG";
case 0x55: /* BURMESE */ return "my_MM";
case 0x53: /* CAMBODIAN */ return "km_KH";
case LANG_CATALAN: return "ca_ES";
case 0x5c: /* CHEROKEE */ return "chr_US";
case LANG_CHINESE:
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_CHINESE_TRADITIONAL: return "zh_TW";
case SUBLANG_CHINESE_SIMPLIFIED: return "zh_CN";
case SUBLANG_CHINESE_HONGKONG: return "zh_HK";
case SUBLANG_CHINESE_SINGAPORE: return "zh_SG";
case SUBLANG_CHINESE_MACAU: return "zh_MO";
}
return "zh";
case LANG_CROATIAN: /* LANG_CROATIAN == LANG_SERBIAN
* What used to be called Serbo-Croatian
* should really now be two separate
* languages because of political reasons.
* (Says tml, who knows nothing about Serbian
* or Croatian.)
* (I can feel those flames coming already.)
*/
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_DEFAULT: return "hr_HR";
case SUBLANG_SERBIAN_LATIN: return "sr_YU";
case SUBLANG_SERBIAN_CYRILLIC: return "sr_YU@cyrillic";
}
return "hr";
case LANG_CZECH: return "cs_CZ";
case LANG_DANISH: return "da_DK";
case LANG_DIVEHI: return "div_MV";
case LANG_DUTCH:
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_DUTCH: return "nl_NL";
case SUBLANG_DUTCH_BELGIAN: /* FLEMISH, VLAAMS */ return "nl_BE";
}
return "nl";
case 0x66: /* EDO */ return "bin_NG";
case LANG_ENGLISH:
switch (sub)
{
/* SUBLANG_ENGLISH_US == SUBLANG_DEFAULT. Heh. I thought
* English was the language spoken in England.
* Oh well.
*/
case SUBLANG_ENGLISH_US: return "en_US";
case SUBLANG_ENGLISH_UK: return "en_GB";
case SUBLANG_ENGLISH_AUS: return "en_AU";
case SUBLANG_ENGLISH_CAN: return "en_CA";
case SUBLANG_ENGLISH_NZ: return "en_NZ";
case SUBLANG_ENGLISH_EIRE: return "en_IE";
case SUBLANG_ENGLISH_SOUTH_AFRICA: return "en_ZA";
case SUBLANG_ENGLISH_JAMAICA: return "en_JM";
case SUBLANG_ENGLISH_CARIBBEAN: return "en_GD"; /* Grenada? */
case SUBLANG_ENGLISH_BELIZE: return "en_BZ";
case SUBLANG_ENGLISH_TRINIDAD: return "en_TT";
case SUBLANG_ENGLISH_ZIMBABWE: return "en_ZW";
case SUBLANG_ENGLISH_PHILIPPINES: return "en_PH";
}
return "en";
case LANG_ESTONIAN: return "et_EE";
case LANG_FAEROESE: return "fo_FO";
case LANG_FARSI: return "fa_IR";
case LANG_FINNISH: return "fi_FI";
case LANG_FRENCH:
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_FRENCH: return "fr_FR";
case SUBLANG_FRENCH_BELGIAN: /* WALLOON */ return "fr_BE";
case SUBLANG_FRENCH_CANADIAN: return "fr_CA";
case SUBLANG_FRENCH_SWISS: return "fr_CH";
case SUBLANG_FRENCH_LUXEMBOURG: return "fr_LU";
case SUBLANG_FRENCH_MONACO: return "fr_MC";
}
return "fr";
case 0x62: /* FRISIAN */ return "fy_NL";
case 0x67: /* FULFULDE */ return "ful_NG";
case 0x3c: /* GAELIC */
switch (sub)
{
case 0x01: /* SCOTTISH */ return "gd_GB";
case 0x02: /* IRISH */ return "ga_IE";
}
return "C";
case LANG_GALICIAN: return "gl_ES";
case LANG_GEORGIAN: return "ka_GE";
case LANG_GERMAN:
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_GERMAN: return "de_DE";
case SUBLANG_GERMAN_SWISS: return "de_CH";
case SUBLANG_GERMAN_AUSTRIAN: return "de_AT";
case SUBLANG_GERMAN_LUXEMBOURG: return "de_LU";
case SUBLANG_GERMAN_LIECHTENSTEIN: return "de_LI";
}
return "de";
case LANG_GREEK: return "el_GR";
case 0x74: /* GUARANI */ return "gn_PY";
case LANG_GUJARATI: return "gu_IN";
case 0x68: /* HAUSA */ return "ha_NG";
case 0x75: /* HAWAIIAN */
/* FIXME: Do they mean Hawaiian ("haw_US", 1000 speakers)
or Hawaii Creole English ("cpe_US", 600000 speakers)? */
return "cpe_US";
case LANG_HEBREW: return "he_IL";
case LANG_HINDI: return "hi_IN";
case LANG_HUNGARIAN: return "hu_HU";
case 0x69: /* IBIBIO */ return "nic_NG";
case LANG_ICELANDIC: return "is_IS";
case 0x70: /* IGBO */ return "ibo_NG";
case LANG_INDONESIAN: return "id_ID";
case 0x5d: /* INUKTITUT */ return "iu_CA";
case LANG_ITALIAN:
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_ITALIAN: return "it_IT";
case SUBLANG_ITALIAN_SWISS: return "it_CH";
}
return "it";
case LANG_JAPANESE: return "ja_JP";
case LANG_KANNADA: return "kn_IN";
case 0x71: /* KANURI */ return "kau_NG";
case LANG_KASHMIRI:
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_DEFAULT: return "ks_PK";
case SUBLANG_KASHMIRI_INDIA: return "ks_IN";
}
return "ks";
case LANG_KAZAK: return "kk_KZ";
case LANG_KONKANI:
/* FIXME: Adjust this when such locales appear on Unix. */
return "kok_IN";
case LANG_KOREAN: return "ko_KR";
case LANG_KYRGYZ: return "ky_KG";
case 0x54: /* LAO */ return "lo_LA";
case 0x76: /* LATIN */ return "la_VA";
case LANG_LATVIAN: return "lv_LV";
case LANG_LITHUANIAN: return "lt_LT";
case LANG_MACEDONIAN: return "mk_MK";
case LANG_MALAY:
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_MALAY_MALAYSIA: return "ms_MY";
case SUBLANG_MALAY_BRUNEI_DARUSSALAM: return "ms_BN";
}
return "ms";
case LANG_MALAYALAM: return "ml_IN";
case 0x3a: /* MALTESE */ return "mt_MT";
case LANG_MANIPURI:
/* FIXME: Adjust this when such locales appear on Unix. */
return "mni_IN";
case LANG_MARATHI: return "mr_IN";
case LANG_MONGOLIAN:
return "mn"; /* Ambiguous: could be "mn_CN" or "mn_MN". */
case LANG_NEPALI:
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_DEFAULT: return "ne_NP";
case SUBLANG_NEPALI_INDIA: return "ne_IN";
}
return "ne";
case LANG_NORWEGIAN:
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_NORWEGIAN_BOKMAL: return "no_NO";
case SUBLANG_NORWEGIAN_NYNORSK: return "nn_NO";
}
return "no";
case LANG_ORIYA: return "or_IN";
case 0x72: /* OROMO */ return "om_ET";
case 0x79: /* PAPIAMENTU */ return "pap_AN";
case 0x63: /* PASHTO */
return "ps"; /* Ambiguous: could be "ps_PK" or "ps_AF". */
case LANG_POLISH: return "pl_PL";
case LANG_PORTUGUESE:
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_PORTUGUESE: return "pt_PT";
/* Hmm. SUBLANG_PORTUGUESE_BRAZILIAN == SUBLANG_DEFAULT.
Same phenomenon as SUBLANG_ENGLISH_US == SUBLANG_DEFAULT. */
case SUBLANG_PORTUGUESE_BRAZILIAN: return "pt_BR";
}
return "pt";
case LANG_PUNJABI: return "pa_IN";
case 0x17: /* RHAETO-ROMANCE */ return "rm_CH";
case LANG_ROMANIAN: return "ro_RO";
case LANG_RUSSIAN:
return "ru"; /* Ambiguous: could be "ru_RU" or "ru_UA". */
case 0x3b: /* SAMI */ return "se_NO";
case LANG_SANSKRIT: return "sa_IN";
case LANG_SINDHI: return "sd";
case 0x5b: /* SINHALESE */ return "si_LK";
case LANG_SLOVAK: return "sk_SK";
case LANG_SLOVENIAN: return "sl_SI";
case 0x77: /* SOMALI */ return "so_SO";
case LANG_SORBIAN:
/* FIXME: Adjust this when such locales appear on Unix. */
return "wen_DE";
case LANG_SPANISH:
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_SPANISH: return "es_ES";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_MEXICAN: return "es_MX";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_MODERN:
return "es_ES@modern"; /* not seen on Unix */
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_GUATEMALA: return "es_GT";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_COSTA_RICA: return "es_CR";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_PANAMA: return "es_PA";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_DOMINICAN_REPUBLIC: return "es_DO";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_VENEZUELA: return "es_VE";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_COLOMBIA: return "es_CO";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_PERU: return "es_PE";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_ARGENTINA: return "es_AR";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_ECUADOR: return "es_EC";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_CHILE: return "es_CL";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_URUGUAY: return "es_UY";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_PARAGUAY: return "es_PY";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_BOLIVIA: return "es_BO";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_EL_SALVADOR: return "es_SV";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_HONDURAS: return "es_HN";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_NICARAGUA: return "es_NI";
case SUBLANG_SPANISH_PUERTO_RICO: return "es_PR";
}
return "es";
case 0x30: /* SUTU */ return "bnt_TZ";
case LANG_SWAHILI: return "sw_KE";
case LANG_SWEDISH:
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_DEFAULT: return "sv_SE";
case SUBLANG_SWEDISH_FINLAND: return "sv_FI";
}
return "sv";
case LANG_SYRIAC: return "syr_TR"; /* An extinct language. */
case 0x64: /* TAGALOG */ return "tl_PH";
case 0x28: /* TAJIK */ return "tg_TJ";
case 0x5f: /* TAMAZIGHT */ return "ber_MA";
case LANG_TAMIL:
return "ta"; /* Ambiguous: could be "ta_IN" or "ta_LK" or "ta_SG". */
case LANG_TATAR: return "tt_RU";
case LANG_TELUGU: return "te_IN";
case LANG_THAI: return "th_TH";
case 0x51: /* TIBETAN */ return "bo_CN";
case 0x73: /* TIGRINYA */ return "ti_ET";
case 0x31: /* TSONGA */ return "ts_ZA";
case LANG_TURKISH: return "tr_TR";
case 0x42: /* TURKMEN */ return "tk_TM";
case LANG_UKRAINIAN: return "uk_UA";
case LANG_URDU:
switch (sub)
{
case SUBLANG_URDU_PAKISTAN: return "ur_PK";
case SUBLANG_URDU_INDIA: return "ur_IN";
}
return "ur";
case LANG_UZBEK:
switch (sub)
{
/* FIXME: Adjust this when Uzbek locales appear on Unix. */
case SUBLANG_UZBEK_LATIN: return "uz_UZ@latin";
case SUBLANG_UZBEK_CYRILLIC: return "uz_UZ@cyrillic";
}
return "uz";
case 0x33: /* VENDA */ return "ven_ZA";
case LANG_VIETNAMESE: return "vi_VN";
case 0x52: /* WELSH */ return "cy_GB";
case 0x34: /* XHOSA */ return "xh_ZA";
case 0x78: /* YI */ return "sit_CN";
case 0x3d: /* YIDDISH */ return "yi_IL";
case 0x6a: /* YORUBA */ return "yo_NG";
case 0x35: /* ZULU */ return "zu_ZA";
default: return "C";
}
#endif
}
lib/intl/log.c
+104
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
/* Log file output.
Copyright (C) 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
/* Written by Bruno Haible <bruno@clisp.org>. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
/* Print an ASCII string with quotes and escape sequences where needed. */
static void
print_escaped (stream, str)
FILE *stream;
const char *str;
{
putc ('"', stream);
for (; *str != '\0'; str++)
if (*str == '\n')
{
fputs ("\\n\"", stream);
if (str[1] == '\0')
return;
fputs ("\n\"", stream);
}
else
{
if (*str == '"' || *str == '\\')
putc ('\\', stream);
putc (*str, stream);
}
putc ('"', stream);
}
/* Add to the log file an entry denoting a failed translation. */
void
_nl_log_untranslated (logfilename, domainname, msgid1, msgid2, plural)
const char *logfilename;
const char *domainname;
const char *msgid1;
const char *msgid2;
int plural;
{
static char *last_logfilename = NULL;
static FILE *last_logfile = NULL;
FILE *logfile;
/* Can we reuse the last opened logfile? */
if (last_logfilename == NULL || strcmp (logfilename, last_logfilename) != 0)
{
/* Close the last used logfile. */
if (last_logfilename != NULL)
{
if (last_logfile != NULL)
{
fclose (last_logfile);
last_logfile = NULL;
}
free (last_logfilename);
last_logfilename = NULL;
}
/* Open the logfile. */
last_logfilename = (char *) malloc (strlen (logfilename) + 1);
if (last_logfilename == NULL)
return;
strcpy (last_logfilename, logfilename);
last_logfile = fopen (logfilename, "a");
if (last_logfile == NULL)
return;
}
logfile = last_logfile;
fprintf (logfile, "domain ");
print_escaped (logfile, domainname);
fprintf (logfile, "\nmsgid ");
print_escaped (logfile, msgid1);
if (plural)
{
fprintf (logfile, "\nmsgid_plural ");
print_escaped (logfile, msgid2);
fprintf (logfile, "\nmsgstr[0] \"\"\n");
}
else
fprintf (logfile, "\nmsgstr \"\"\n");
putc ('\n', logfile);
}
lib/intl/ngettext.c
+68
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
/* Implementation of ngettext(3) function.
Copyright (C) 1995, 1997, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#ifdef _LIBC
# define __need_NULL
# include <stddef.h>
#else
# include <stdlib.h> /* Just for NULL. */
#endif
#include "gettextP.h"
#ifdef _LIBC
# include <libintl.h>
#else
# include "libgnuintl.h"
#endif
#include <locale.h>
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
/* Names for the libintl functions are a problem. They must not clash
with existing names and they should follow ANSI C. But this source
code is also used in GNU C Library where the names have a __
prefix. So we have to make a difference here. */
#ifdef _LIBC
# define NGETTEXT __ngettext
# define DCNGETTEXT __dcngettext
#else
# define NGETTEXT libintl_ngettext
# define DCNGETTEXT libintl_dcngettext
#endif
/* Look up MSGID in the current default message catalog for the current
LC_MESSAGES locale. If not found, returns MSGID itself (the default
text). */
char *
NGETTEXT (msgid1, msgid2, n)
const char *msgid1;
const char *msgid2;
unsigned long int n;
{
return DCNGETTEXT (NULL, msgid1, msgid2, n, LC_MESSAGES);
}
#ifdef _LIBC
/* Alias for function name in GNU C Library. */
weak_alias (__ngettext, ngettext);
#endif
lib/intl/os2compat.c
+98
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
/* OS/2 compatibility functions.
Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#define OS2_AWARE
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <sys/param.h>
/* A version of getenv() that works from DLLs */
extern unsigned long DosScanEnv (const unsigned char *pszName, unsigned char **ppszValue);
char *
_nl_getenv (const char *name)
{
unsigned char *value;
if (DosScanEnv (name, &value))
return NULL;
else
return value;
}
/* A fixed size buffer. */
char libintl_nl_default_dirname[MAXPATHLEN+1];
char *_nlos2_libdir = NULL;
char *_nlos2_localealiaspath = NULL;
char *_nlos2_localedir = NULL;
static __attribute__((constructor)) void
nlos2_initialize ()
{
char *root = getenv ("UNIXROOT");
char *gnulocaledir = getenv ("GNULOCALEDIR");
_nlos2_libdir = gnulocaledir;
if (!_nlos2_libdir)
{
if (root)
{
size_t sl = strlen (root);
_nlos2_libdir = (char *) malloc (sl + strlen (LIBDIR) + 1);
memcpy (_nlos2_libdir, root, sl);
memcpy (_nlos2_libdir + sl, LIBDIR, strlen (LIBDIR) + 1);
}
else
_nlos2_libdir = LIBDIR;
}
_nlos2_localealiaspath = gnulocaledir;
if (!_nlos2_localealiaspath)
{
if (root)
{
size_t sl = strlen (root);
_nlos2_localealiaspath = (char *) malloc (sl + strlen (LOCALE_ALIAS_PATH) + 1);
memcpy (_nlos2_localealiaspath, root, sl);
memcpy (_nlos2_localealiaspath + sl, LOCALE_ALIAS_PATH, strlen (LOCALE_ALIAS_PATH) + 1);
}
else
_nlos2_localealiaspath = LOCALE_ALIAS_PATH;
}
_nlos2_localedir = gnulocaledir;
if (!_nlos2_localedir)
{
if (root)
{
size_t sl = strlen (root);
_nlos2_localedir = (char *) malloc (sl + strlen (LOCALEDIR) + 1);
memcpy (_nlos2_localedir, root, sl);
memcpy (_nlos2_localedir + sl, LOCALEDIR, strlen (LOCALEDIR) + 1);
}
else
_nlos2_localedir = LOCALEDIR;
}
if (strlen (_nlos2_localedir) <= MAXPATHLEN)
strcpy (libintl_nl_default_dirname, _nlos2_localedir);
}
lib/intl/os2compat.h
+46
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
/* OS/2 compatibility defines.
This file is intended to be included from config.h
Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
/* When included from os2compat.h we need all the original definitions */
#ifndef OS2_AWARE
#undef LIBDIR
#define LIBDIR _nlos2_libdir
extern char *_nlos2_libdir;
#undef LOCALEDIR
#define LOCALEDIR _nlos2_localedir
extern char *_nlos2_localedir;
#undef LOCALE_ALIAS_PATH
#define LOCALE_ALIAS_PATH _nlos2_localealiaspath
extern char *_nlos2_localealiaspath;
#endif
#undef HAVE_STRCASECMP
#define HAVE_STRCASECMP 1
#define strcasecmp stricmp
#define strncasecmp strnicmp
/* We have our own getenv() which works even if library is compiled as DLL */
#define getenv _nl_getenv
/* Older versions of gettext used -1 as the value of LC_MESSAGES */
#define LC_MESSAGES_COMPAT (-1)
lib/intl/osdep.c
+24
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
/* OS dependent parts of libintl.
Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#if defined __EMX__
# include "os2compat.c"
#else
/* Avoid AIX compiler warning. */
typedef int dummy;
#endif
lib/intl/plural-exp.c
+156
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
/* Expression parsing for plural form selection.
Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Written by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@cygnus.com>, 2000.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <ctype.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "plural-exp.h"
#if (defined __GNUC__ && !defined __APPLE_CC__) \
|| (defined __STDC_VERSION__ && __STDC_VERSION__ >= 199901L)
/* These structs are the constant expression for the germanic plural
form determination. It represents the expression "n != 1". */
static const struct expression plvar =
{
.nargs = 0,
.operation = var,
};
static const struct expression plone =
{
.nargs = 0,
.operation = num,
.val =
{
.num = 1
}
};
struct expression GERMANIC_PLURAL =
{
.nargs = 2,
.operation = not_equal,
.val =
{
.args =
{
[0] = (struct expression *) &plvar,
[1] = (struct expression *) &plone
}
}
};
# define INIT_GERMANIC_PLURAL()
#else
/* For compilers without support for ISO C 99 struct/union initializers:
Initialization at run-time. */
static struct expression plvar;
static struct expression plone;
struct expression GERMANIC_PLURAL;
static void
init_germanic_plural ()
{
if (plone.val.num == 0)
{
plvar.nargs = 0;
plvar.operation = var;
plone.nargs = 0;
plone.operation = num;
plone.val.num = 1;
GERMANIC_PLURAL.nargs = 2;
GERMANIC_PLURAL.operation = not_equal;
GERMANIC_PLURAL.val.args[0] = &plvar;
GERMANIC_PLURAL.val.args[1] = &plone;
}
}
# define INIT_GERMANIC_PLURAL() init_germanic_plural ()
#endif
void
internal_function
EXTRACT_PLURAL_EXPRESSION (nullentry, pluralp, npluralsp)
const char *nullentry;
struct expression **pluralp;
unsigned long int *npluralsp;
{
if (nullentry != NULL)
{
const char *plural;
const char *nplurals;
plural = strstr (nullentry, "plural=");
nplurals = strstr (nullentry, "nplurals=");
if (plural == NULL || nplurals == NULL)
goto no_plural;
else
{
char *endp;
unsigned long int n;
struct parse_args args;
/* First get the number. */
nplurals += 9;
while (*nplurals != '\0' && isspace ((unsigned char) *nplurals))
++nplurals;
if (!(*nplurals >= '0' && *nplurals <= '9'))
goto no_plural;
#if defined HAVE_STRTOUL || defined _LIBC
n = strtoul (nplurals, &endp, 10);
#else
for (endp = nplurals, n = 0; *endp >= '0' && *endp <= '9'; endp++)
n = n * 10 + (*endp - '0');
#endif
if (nplurals == endp)
goto no_plural;
*npluralsp = n;
/* Due to the restrictions bison imposes onto the interface of the
scanner function we have to put the input string and the result
passed up from the parser into the same structure which address
is passed down to the parser. */
plural += 7;
args.cp = plural;
if (PLURAL_PARSE (&args) != 0)
goto no_plural;
*pluralp = args.res;
}
}
else
{
/* By default we are using the Germanic form: singular form only
for `one', the plural form otherwise. Yes, this is also what
English is using since English is a Germanic language. */
no_plural:
INIT_GERMANIC_PLURAL ();
*pluralp = &GERMANIC_PLURAL;
*npluralsp = 2;
}
}
lib/intl/plural-exp.h
+126
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
/* Expression parsing and evaluation for plural form selection.
Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Written by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@cygnus.com>, 2000.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifndef _PLURAL_EXP_H
#define _PLURAL_EXP_H
#ifndef PARAMS
# if __STDC__ || defined __GNUC__ || defined __SUNPRO_C || defined __cplusplus || __PROTOTYPES
# define PARAMS(args) args
# else
# define PARAMS(args) ()
# endif
#endif
#ifndef internal_function
# define internal_function
#endif
#ifndef attribute_hidden
# define attribute_hidden
#endif
/* This is the representation of the expressions to determine the
plural form. */
struct expression
{
int nargs; /* Number of arguments. */
enum operator
{
/* Without arguments: */
var, /* The variable "n". */
num, /* Decimal number. */
/* Unary operators: */
lnot, /* Logical NOT. */
/* Binary operators: */
mult, /* Multiplication. */
divide, /* Division. */
module, /* Modulo operation. */
plus, /* Addition. */
minus, /* Subtraction. */
less_than, /* Comparison. */
greater_than, /* Comparison. */
less_or_equal, /* Comparison. */
greater_or_equal, /* Comparison. */
equal, /* Comparison for equality. */
not_equal, /* Comparison for inequality. */
land, /* Logical AND. */
lor, /* Logical OR. */
/* Ternary operators: */
qmop /* Question mark operator. */
} operation;
union
{
unsigned long int num; /* Number value for `num'. */
struct expression *args[3]; /* Up to three arguments. */
} val;
};
/* This is the data structure to pass information to the parser and get
the result in a thread-safe way. */
struct parse_args
{
const char *cp;
struct expression *res;
};
/* Names for the libintl functions are a problem. This source code is used
1. in the GNU C Library library,
2. in the GNU libintl library,
3. in the GNU gettext tools.
The function names in each situation must be different, to allow for
binary incompatible changes in 'struct expression'. Furthermore,
1. in the GNU C Library library, the names have a __ prefix,
2.+3. in the GNU libintl library and in the GNU gettext tools, the names
must follow ANSI C and not start with __.
So we have to distinguish the three cases. */
#ifdef _LIBC
# define FREE_EXPRESSION __gettext_free_exp
# define PLURAL_PARSE __gettextparse
# define GERMANIC_PLURAL __gettext_germanic_plural
# define EXTRACT_PLURAL_EXPRESSION __gettext_extract_plural
#elif defined (IN_LIBINTL)
# define FREE_EXPRESSION libintl_gettext_free_exp
# define PLURAL_PARSE libintl_gettextparse
# define GERMANIC_PLURAL libintl_gettext_germanic_plural
# define EXTRACT_PLURAL_EXPRESSION libintl_gettext_extract_plural
#else
# define FREE_EXPRESSION free_plural_expression
# define PLURAL_PARSE parse_plural_expression
# define GERMANIC_PLURAL germanic_plural
# define EXTRACT_PLURAL_EXPRESSION extract_plural_expression
#endif
extern void FREE_EXPRESSION PARAMS ((struct expression *exp))
internal_function;
extern int PLURAL_PARSE PARAMS ((void *arg));
extern struct expression GERMANIC_PLURAL attribute_hidden;
extern void EXTRACT_PLURAL_EXPRESSION PARAMS ((const char *nullentry,
struct expression **pluralp,
unsigned long int *npluralsp))
internal_function;
#if !defined (_LIBC) && !defined (IN_LIBINTL)
extern unsigned long int plural_eval PARAMS ((struct expression *pexp,
unsigned long int n));
#endif
#endif /* _PLURAL_EXP_H */
lib/intl/plural.c
+1518
View File
File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff
lib/intl/plural.y
+409
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,409 @@
%{
/* Expression parsing for plural form selection.
Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Written by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@cygnus.com>, 2000.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
/* The bison generated parser uses alloca. AIX 3 forces us to put this
declaration at the beginning of the file. The declaration in bison's
skeleton file comes too late. This must come before <config.h>
because <config.h> may include arbitrary system headers. */
#if defined _AIX && !defined __GNUC__
#pragma alloca
#endif
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <stddef.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include "plural-exp.h"
/* The main function generated by the parser is called __gettextparse,
but we want it to be called PLURAL_PARSE. */
#ifndef _LIBC
# define __gettextparse PLURAL_PARSE
#endif
#define YYLEX_PARAM &((struct parse_args *) arg)->cp
#define YYPARSE_PARAM arg
%}
%pure_parser
%expect 7
%union {
unsigned long int num;
enum operator op;
struct expression *exp;
}
%{
/* Prototypes for local functions. */
static struct expression *new_exp PARAMS ((int nargs, enum operator op,
struct expression * const *args));
static inline struct expression *new_exp_0 PARAMS ((enum operator op));
static inline struct expression *new_exp_1 PARAMS ((enum operator op,
struct expression *right));
static struct expression *new_exp_2 PARAMS ((enum operator op,
struct expression *left,
struct expression *right));
static inline struct expression *new_exp_3 PARAMS ((enum operator op,
struct expression *bexp,
struct expression *tbranch,
struct expression *fbranch));
static int yylex PARAMS ((YYSTYPE *lval, const char **pexp));
static void yyerror PARAMS ((const char *str));
/* Allocation of expressions. */
static struct expression *
new_exp (nargs, op, args)
int nargs;
enum operator op;
struct expression * const *args;
{
int i;
struct expression *newp;
/* If any of the argument could not be malloc'ed, just return NULL. */
for (i = nargs - 1; i >= 0; i--)
if (args[i] == NULL)
goto fail;
/* Allocate a new expression. */
newp = (struct expression *) malloc (sizeof (*newp));
if (newp != NULL)
{
newp->nargs = nargs;
newp->operation = op;
for (i = nargs - 1; i >= 0; i--)
newp->val.args[i] = args[i];
return newp;
}
fail:
for (i = nargs - 1; i >= 0; i--)
FREE_EXPRESSION (args[i]);
return NULL;
}
static inline struct expression *
new_exp_0 (op)
enum operator op;
{
return new_exp (0, op, NULL);
}
static inline struct expression *
new_exp_1 (op, right)
enum operator op;
struct expression *right;
{
struct expression *args[1];
args[0] = right;
return new_exp (1, op, args);
}
static struct expression *
new_exp_2 (op, left, right)
enum operator op;
struct expression *left;
struct expression *right;
{
struct expression *args[2];
args[0] = left;
args[1] = right;
return new_exp (2, op, args);
}
static inline struct expression *
new_exp_3 (op, bexp, tbranch, fbranch)
enum operator op;
struct expression *bexp;
struct expression *tbranch;
struct expression *fbranch;
{
struct expression *args[3];
args[0] = bexp;
args[1] = tbranch;
args[2] = fbranch;
return new_exp (3, op, args);
}
%}
/* This declares that all operators have the same associativity and the
precedence order as in C. See [Harbison, Steele: C, A Reference Manual].
There is no unary minus and no bitwise operators.
Operators with the same syntactic behaviour have been merged into a single
token, to save space in the array generated by bison. */
%right '?' /* ? */
%left '|' /* || */
%left '&' /* && */
%left EQUOP2 /* == != */
%left CMPOP2 /* < > <= >= */
%left ADDOP2 /* + - */
%left MULOP2 /* * / % */
%right '!' /* ! */
%token <op> EQUOP2 CMPOP2 ADDOP2 MULOP2
%token <num> NUMBER
%type <exp> exp
%%
start: exp
{
if ($1 == NULL)
YYABORT;
((struct parse_args *) arg)->res = $1;
}
;
exp: exp '?' exp ':' exp
{
$$ = new_exp_3 (qmop, $1, $3, $5);
}
| exp '|' exp
{
$$ = new_exp_2 (lor, $1, $3);
}
| exp '&' exp
{
$$ = new_exp_2 (land, $1, $3);
}
| exp EQUOP2 exp
{
$$ = new_exp_2 ($2, $1, $3);
}
| exp CMPOP2 exp
{
$$ = new_exp_2 ($2, $1, $3);
}
| exp ADDOP2 exp
{
$$ = new_exp_2 ($2, $1, $3);
}
| exp MULOP2 exp
{
$$ = new_exp_2 ($2, $1, $3);
}
| '!' exp
{
$$ = new_exp_1 (lnot, $2);
}
| 'n'
{
$$ = new_exp_0 (var);
}
| NUMBER
{
if (($$ = new_exp_0 (num)) != NULL)
$$->val.num = $1;
}
| '(' exp ')'
{
$$ = $2;
}
;
%%
void
internal_function
FREE_EXPRESSION (exp)
struct expression *exp;
{
if (exp == NULL)
return;
/* Handle the recursive case. */
switch (exp->nargs)
{
case 3:
FREE_EXPRESSION (exp->val.args[2]);
/* FALLTHROUGH */
case 2:
FREE_EXPRESSION (exp->val.args[1]);
/* FALLTHROUGH */
case 1:
FREE_EXPRESSION (exp->val.args[0]);
/* FALLTHROUGH */
default:
break;
}
free (exp);
}
static int
yylex (lval, pexp)
YYSTYPE *lval;
const char **pexp;
{
const char *exp = *pexp;
int result;
while (1)
{
if (exp[0] == '\0')
{
*pexp = exp;
return YYEOF;
}
if (exp[0] != ' ' && exp[0] != '\t')
break;
++exp;
}
result = *exp++;
switch (result)
{
case '0': case '1': case '2': case '3': case '4':
case '5': case '6': case '7': case '8': case '9':
{
unsigned long int n = result - '0';
while (exp[0] >= '0' && exp[0] <= '9')
{
n *= 10;
n += exp[0] - '0';
++exp;
}
lval->num = n;
result = NUMBER;
}
break;
case '=':
if (exp[0] == '=')
{
++exp;
lval->op = equal;
result = EQUOP2;
}
else
result = YYERRCODE;
break;
case '!':
if (exp[0] == '=')
{
++exp;
lval->op = not_equal;
result = EQUOP2;
}
break;
case '&':
case '|':
if (exp[0] == result)
++exp;
else
result = YYERRCODE;
break;
case '<':
if (exp[0] == '=')
{
++exp;
lval->op = less_or_equal;
}
else
lval->op = less_than;
result = CMPOP2;
break;
case '>':
if (exp[0] == '=')
{
++exp;
lval->op = greater_or_equal;
}
else
lval->op = greater_than;
result = CMPOP2;
break;
case '*':
lval->op = mult;
result = MULOP2;
break;
case '/':
lval->op = divide;
result = MULOP2;
break;
case '%':
lval->op = module;
result = MULOP2;
break;
case '+':
lval->op = plus;
result = ADDOP2;
break;
case '-':
lval->op = minus;
result = ADDOP2;
break;
case 'n':
case '?':
case ':':
case '(':
case ')':
/* Nothing, just return the character. */
break;
case ';':
case '\n':
case '\0':
/* Be safe and let the user call this function again. */
--exp;
result = YYEOF;
break;
default:
result = YYERRCODE;
#if YYDEBUG != 0
--exp;
#endif
break;
}
*pexp = exp;
return result;
}
static void
yyerror (str)
const char *str;
{
/* Do nothing. We don't print error messages here. */
}
lib/intl/ref-add.sin
+31
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
# Add this package to a list of references stored in a text file.
#
# Copyright (C) 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
#
# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
# under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
# by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
# any later version.
#
# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
# Library General Public License for more details.
#
# You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
# License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
# USA.
#
# Written by Bruno Haible <haible@clisp.cons.org>.
#
/^# Packages using this file: / {
s/# Packages using this file://
ta
:a
s/ @PACKAGE@ / @PACKAGE@ /
tb
s/ $/ @PACKAGE@ /
:b
s/^/# Packages using this file:/
}
lib/intl/ref-del.sin
+26
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
# Remove this package from a list of references stored in a text file.
#
# Copyright (C) 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
#
# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
# under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
# by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
# any later version.
#
# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
# Library General Public License for more details.
#
# You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
# License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
# USA.
#
# Written by Bruno Haible <haible@clisp.cons.org>.
#
/^# Packages using this file: / {
s/# Packages using this file://
s/ @PACKAGE@ / /
s/^/# Packages using this file:/
}
lib/intl/relocatable.c
+439
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,439 @@
/* Provide relocatable packages.
Copyright (C) 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Written by Bruno Haible <bruno@clisp.org>, 2003.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
/* Tell glibc's <stdio.h> to provide a prototype for getline().
This must come before <config.h> because <config.h> may include
<features.h>, and once <features.h> has been included, it's too late. */
#ifndef _GNU_SOURCE
# define _GNU_SOURCE 1
#endif
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include "config.h"
#endif
/* Specification. */
#include "relocatable.h"
#if ENABLE_RELOCATABLE
#include <stddef.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#ifdef NO_XMALLOC
# define xmalloc malloc
#else
# include "xmalloc.h"
#endif
#if DEPENDS_ON_LIBCHARSET
# include <libcharset.h>
#endif
#if DEPENDS_ON_LIBICONV && HAVE_ICONV
# include <iconv.h>
#endif
#if DEPENDS_ON_LIBINTL && ENABLE_NLS
# include <libintl.h>
#endif
/* Faked cheap 'bool'. */
#undef bool
#undef false
#undef true
#define bool int
#define false 0
#define true 1
/* Pathname support.
ISSLASH(C) tests whether C is a directory separator character.
IS_PATH_WITH_DIR(P) tests whether P contains a directory specification.
*/
#if defined _WIN32 || defined __WIN32__ || defined __EMX__ || defined __DJGPP__
/* Win32, OS/2, DOS */
# define ISSLASH(C) ((C) == '/' || (C) == '\\')
# define HAS_DEVICE(P) \
((((P)[0] >= 'A' && (P)[0] <= 'Z') || ((P)[0] >= 'a' && (P)[0] <= 'z')) \
&& (P)[1] == ':')
# define IS_PATH_WITH_DIR(P) \
(strchr (P, '/') != NULL || strchr (P, '\\') != NULL || HAS_DEVICE (P))
# define FILESYSTEM_PREFIX_LEN(P) (HAS_DEVICE (P) ? 2 : 0)
#else
/* Unix */
# define ISSLASH(C) ((C) == '/')
# define IS_PATH_WITH_DIR(P) (strchr (P, '/') != NULL)
# define FILESYSTEM_PREFIX_LEN(P) 0
#endif
/* Original installation prefix. */
static char *orig_prefix;
static size_t orig_prefix_len;
/* Current installation prefix. */
static char *curr_prefix;
static size_t curr_prefix_len;
/* These prefixes do not end in a slash. Anything that will be concatenated
to them must start with a slash. */
/* Sets the original and the current installation prefix of this module.
Relocation simply replaces a pathname starting with the original prefix
by the corresponding pathname with the current prefix instead. Both
prefixes should be directory names without trailing slash (i.e. use ""
instead of "/"). */
static void
set_this_relocation_prefix (const char *orig_prefix_arg,
const char *curr_prefix_arg)
{
if (orig_prefix_arg != NULL && curr_prefix_arg != NULL
/* Optimization: if orig_prefix and curr_prefix are equal, the
relocation is a nop. */
&& strcmp (orig_prefix_arg, curr_prefix_arg) != 0)
{
/* Duplicate the argument strings. */
char *memory;
orig_prefix_len = strlen (orig_prefix_arg);
curr_prefix_len = strlen (curr_prefix_arg);
memory = (char *) xmalloc (orig_prefix_len + 1 + curr_prefix_len + 1);
#ifdef NO_XMALLOC
if (memory != NULL)
#endif
{
memcpy (memory, orig_prefix_arg, orig_prefix_len + 1);
orig_prefix = memory;
memory += orig_prefix_len + 1;
memcpy (memory, curr_prefix_arg, curr_prefix_len + 1);
curr_prefix = memory;
return;
}
}
orig_prefix = NULL;
curr_prefix = NULL;
/* Don't worry about wasted memory here - this function is usually only
called once. */
}
/* Sets the original and the current installation prefix of the package.
Relocation simply replaces a pathname starting with the original prefix
by the corresponding pathname with the current prefix instead. Both
prefixes should be directory names without trailing slash (i.e. use ""
instead of "/"). */
void
set_relocation_prefix (const char *orig_prefix_arg, const char *curr_prefix_arg)
{
set_this_relocation_prefix (orig_prefix_arg, curr_prefix_arg);
/* Now notify all dependent libraries. */
#if DEPENDS_ON_LIBCHARSET
libcharset_set_relocation_prefix (orig_prefix_arg, curr_prefix_arg);
#endif
#if DEPENDS_ON_LIBICONV && HAVE_ICONV && _LIBICONV_VERSION >= 0x0109
libiconv_set_relocation_prefix (orig_prefix_arg, curr_prefix_arg);
#endif
#if DEPENDS_ON_LIBINTL && ENABLE_NLS && defined libintl_set_relocation_prefix
libintl_set_relocation_prefix (orig_prefix_arg, curr_prefix_arg);
#endif
}
/* Convenience function:
Computes the current installation prefix, based on the original
installation prefix, the original installation directory of a particular
file, and the current pathname of this file. Returns NULL upon failure. */
#ifdef IN_LIBRARY
#define compute_curr_prefix local_compute_curr_prefix
static
#endif
const char *
compute_curr_prefix (const char *orig_installprefix,
const char *orig_installdir,
const char *curr_pathname)
{
const char *curr_installdir;
const char *rel_installdir;
if (curr_pathname == NULL)
return NULL;
/* Determine the relative installation directory, relative to the prefix.
This is simply the difference between orig_installprefix and
orig_installdir. */
if (strncmp (orig_installprefix, orig_installdir, strlen (orig_installprefix))
!= 0)
/* Shouldn't happen - nothing should be installed outside $(prefix). */
return NULL;
rel_installdir = orig_installdir + strlen (orig_installprefix);
/* Determine the current installation directory. */
{
const char *p_base = curr_pathname + FILESYSTEM_PREFIX_LEN (curr_pathname);
const char *p = curr_pathname + strlen (curr_pathname);
char *q;
while (p > p_base)
{
p--;
if (ISSLASH (*p))
break;
}
q = (char *) xmalloc (p - curr_pathname + 1);
#ifdef NO_XMALLOC
if (q == NULL)
return NULL;
#endif
memcpy (q, curr_pathname, p - curr_pathname);
q[p - curr_pathname] = '\0';
curr_installdir = q;
}
/* Compute the current installation prefix by removing the trailing
rel_installdir from it. */
{
const char *rp = rel_installdir + strlen (rel_installdir);
const char *cp = curr_installdir + strlen (curr_installdir);
const char *cp_base =
curr_installdir + FILESYSTEM_PREFIX_LEN (curr_installdir);
while (rp > rel_installdir && cp > cp_base)
{
bool same = false;
const char *rpi = rp;
const char *cpi = cp;
while (rpi > rel_installdir && cpi > cp_base)
{
rpi--;
cpi--;
if (ISSLASH (*rpi) || ISSLASH (*cpi))
{
if (ISSLASH (*rpi) && ISSLASH (*cpi))
same = true;
break;
}
#if defined _WIN32 || defined __WIN32__ || defined __EMX__ || defined __DJGPP__
/* Win32, OS/2, DOS - case insignificant filesystem */
if ((*rpi >= 'a' && *rpi <= 'z' ? *rpi - 'a' + 'A' : *rpi)
!= (*cpi >= 'a' && *cpi <= 'z' ? *cpi - 'a' + 'A' : *cpi))
break;
#else
if (*rpi != *cpi)
break;
#endif
}
if (!same)
break;
/* The last pathname component was the same. opi and cpi now point
to the slash before it. */
rp = rpi;
cp = cpi;
}
if (rp > rel_installdir)
/* Unexpected: The curr_installdir does not end with rel_installdir. */
return NULL;
{
size_t curr_prefix_len = cp - curr_installdir;
char *curr_prefix;
curr_prefix = (char *) xmalloc (curr_prefix_len + 1);
#ifdef NO_XMALLOC
if (curr_prefix == NULL)
return NULL;
#endif
memcpy (curr_prefix, curr_installdir, curr_prefix_len);
curr_prefix[curr_prefix_len] = '\0';
return curr_prefix;
}
}
}
#if defined PIC && defined INSTALLDIR
/* Full pathname of shared library, or NULL. */
static char *shared_library_fullname;
#if defined _WIN32 || defined __WIN32__
/* Determine the full pathname of the shared library when it is loaded. */
BOOL WINAPI
DllMain (HINSTANCE module_handle, DWORD event, LPVOID reserved)
{
(void) reserved;
if (event == DLL_PROCESS_ATTACH)
{
/* The DLL is being loaded into an application's address range. */
static char location[MAX_PATH];
if (!GetModuleFileName (module_handle, location, sizeof (location)))
/* Shouldn't happen. */
return FALSE;
if (!IS_PATH_WITH_DIR (location))
/* Shouldn't happen. */
return FALSE;
shared_library_fullname = strdup (location);
}
return TRUE;
}
#else /* Unix */
static void
find_shared_library_fullname ()
{
#ifdef __linux__
FILE *fp;
/* Open the current process' maps file. It describes one VMA per line. */
fp = fopen ("/proc/self/maps", "r");
if (fp)
{
unsigned long address = (unsigned long) &find_shared_library_fullname;
for (;;)
{
unsigned long start, end;
int c;
if (fscanf (fp, "%lx-%lx", &start, &end) != 2)
break;
if (address >= start && address <= end - 1)
{
/* Found it. Now see if this line contains a filename. */
while (c = getc (fp), c != EOF && c != '\n' && c != '/')
continue;
if (c == '/')
{
size_t size;
int len;
ungetc (c, fp);
shared_library_fullname = NULL; size = 0;
len = getline (&shared_library_fullname, &size, fp);
if (len >= 0)
{
/* Success: filled shared_library_fullname. */
if (len > 0 && shared_library_fullname[len - 1] == '\n')
shared_library_fullname[len - 1] = '\0';
}
}
break;
}
while (c = getc (fp), c != EOF && c != '\n')
continue;
}
fclose (fp);
}
#endif
}
#endif /* WIN32 / Unix */
/* Return the full pathname of the current shared library.
Return NULL if unknown.
Guaranteed to work only on Linux and Woe32. */
static char *
get_shared_library_fullname ()
{
#if !(defined _WIN32 || defined __WIN32__)
static bool tried_find_shared_library_fullname;
if (!tried_find_shared_library_fullname)
{
find_shared_library_fullname ();
tried_find_shared_library_fullname = true;
}
#endif
return shared_library_fullname;
}
#endif /* PIC */
/* Returns the pathname, relocated according to the current installation
directory. */
const char *
relocate (const char *pathname)
{
#if defined PIC && defined INSTALLDIR
static int initialized;
/* Initialization code for a shared library. */
if (!initialized)
{
/* At this point, orig_prefix and curr_prefix likely have already been
set through the main program's set_program_name_and_installdir
function. This is sufficient in the case that the library has
initially been installed in the same orig_prefix. But we can do
better, to also cover the cases that 1. it has been installed
in a different prefix before being moved to orig_prefix and (later)
to curr_prefix, 2. unlike the program, it has not moved away from
orig_prefix. */
const char *orig_installprefix = INSTALLPREFIX;
const char *orig_installdir = INSTALLDIR;
const char *curr_prefix_better;
curr_prefix_better =
compute_curr_prefix (orig_installprefix, orig_installdir,
get_shared_library_fullname ());
if (curr_prefix_better == NULL)
curr_prefix_better = curr_prefix;
set_relocation_prefix (orig_installprefix, curr_prefix_better);
initialized = 1;
}
#endif
/* Note: It is not necessary to perform case insensitive comparison here,
even for DOS-like filesystems, because the pathname argument was
typically created from the same Makefile variable as orig_prefix came
from. */
if (orig_prefix != NULL && curr_prefix != NULL
&& strncmp (pathname, orig_prefix, orig_prefix_len) == 0)
{
if (pathname[orig_prefix_len] == '\0')
/* pathname equals orig_prefix. */
return curr_prefix;
if (ISSLASH (pathname[orig_prefix_len]))
{
/* pathname starts with orig_prefix. */
const char *pathname_tail = &pathname[orig_prefix_len];
char *result =
(char *) xmalloc (curr_prefix_len + strlen (pathname_tail) + 1);
#ifdef NO_XMALLOC
if (result != NULL)
#endif
{
memcpy (result, curr_prefix, curr_prefix_len);
strcpy (result + curr_prefix_len, pathname_tail);
return result;
}
}
}
/* Nothing to relocate. */
return pathname;
}
#endif
lib/intl/relocatable.h
+67
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
/* Provide relocatable packages.
Copyright (C) 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Written by Bruno Haible <bruno@clisp.org>, 2003.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifndef _RELOCATABLE_H
#define _RELOCATABLE_H
/* This can be enabled through the configure --enable-relocatable option. */
#if ENABLE_RELOCATABLE
/* When building a DLL, we must export some functions. Note that because
this is a private .h file, we don't need to use __declspec(dllimport)
in any case. */
#if defined _MSC_VER && BUILDING_DLL
# define RELOCATABLE_DLL_EXPORTED __declspec(dllexport)
#else
# define RELOCATABLE_DLL_EXPORTED
#endif
/* Sets the original and the current installation prefix of the package.
Relocation simply replaces a pathname starting with the original prefix
by the corresponding pathname with the current prefix instead. Both
prefixes should be directory names without trailing slash (i.e. use ""
instead of "/"). */
extern RELOCATABLE_DLL_EXPORTED void
set_relocation_prefix (const char *orig_prefix,
const char *curr_prefix);
/* Returns the pathname, relocated according to the current installation
directory. */
extern const char * relocate (const char *pathname);
/* Memory management: relocate() leaks memory, because it has to construct
a fresh pathname. If this is a problem because your program calls
relocate() frequently, think about caching the result. */
/* Convenience function:
Computes the current installation prefix, based on the original
installation prefix, the original installation directory of a particular
file, and the current pathname of this file. Returns NULL upon failure. */
extern const char * compute_curr_prefix (const char *orig_installprefix,
const char *orig_installdir,
const char *curr_pathname);
#else
/* By default, we use the hardwired pathnames. */
#define relocate(pathname) (pathname)
#endif
#endif /* _RELOCATABLE_H */
lib/intl/textdomain.c
+142
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
/* Implementation of the textdomain(3) function.
Copyright (C) 1995-1998, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA. */
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#ifdef _LIBC
# include <libintl.h>
#else
# include "libgnuintl.h"
#endif
#include "gettextP.h"
#ifdef _LIBC
/* We have to handle multi-threaded applications. */
# include <bits/libc-lock.h>
#else
/* Provide dummy implementation if this is outside glibc. */
# define __libc_rwlock_define(CLASS, NAME)
# define __libc_rwlock_wrlock(NAME)
# define __libc_rwlock_unlock(NAME)
#endif
/* The internal variables in the standalone libintl.a must have different
names than the internal variables in GNU libc, otherwise programs
using libintl.a cannot be linked statically. */
#if !defined _LIBC
# define _nl_default_default_domain libintl_nl_default_default_domain
# define _nl_current_default_domain libintl_nl_current_default_domain
#endif
/* @@ end of prolog @@ */
/* Name of the default text domain. */
extern const char _nl_default_default_domain[] attribute_hidden;
/* Default text domain in which entries for gettext(3) are to be found. */
extern const char *_nl_current_default_domain attribute_hidden;
/* Names for the libintl functions are a problem. They must not clash
with existing names and they should follow ANSI C. But this source
code is also used in GNU C Library where the names have a __
prefix. So we have to make a difference here. */
#ifdef _LIBC
# define TEXTDOMAIN __textdomain
# ifndef strdup
# define strdup(str) __strdup (str)
# endif
#else
# define TEXTDOMAIN libintl_textdomain
#endif
/* Lock variable to protect the global data in the gettext implementation. */
__libc_rwlock_define (extern, _nl_state_lock attribute_hidden)
/* Set the current default message catalog to DOMAINNAME.
If DOMAINNAME is null, return the current default.
If DOMAINNAME is "", reset to the default of "messages". */
char *
TEXTDOMAIN (domainname)
const char *domainname;
{
char *new_domain;
char *old_domain;
/* A NULL pointer requests the current setting. */
if (domainname == NULL)
return (char *) _nl_current_default_domain;
__libc_rwlock_wrlock (_nl_state_lock);
old_domain = (char *) _nl_current_default_domain;
/* If domain name is the null string set to default domain "messages". */
if (domainname[0] == '\0'
|| strcmp (domainname, _nl_default_default_domain) == 0)
{
_nl_current_default_domain = _nl_default_default_domain;
new_domain = (char *) _nl_current_default_domain;
}
else if (strcmp (domainname, old_domain) == 0)
/* This can happen and people will use it to signal that some
environment variable changed. */
new_domain = old_domain;
else
{
/* If the following malloc fails `_nl_current_default_domain'
will be NULL. This value will be returned and so signals we
are out of core. */
#if defined _LIBC || defined HAVE_STRDUP
new_domain = strdup (domainname);
#else
size_t len = strlen (domainname) + 1;
new_domain = (char *) malloc (len);
if (new_domain != NULL)
memcpy (new_domain, domainname, len);
#endif
if (new_domain != NULL)
_nl_current_default_domain = new_domain;
}
/* We use this possibility to signal a change of the loaded catalogs
since this is most likely the case and there is no other easy we
to do it. Do it only when the call was successful. */
if (new_domain != NULL)
{
++_nl_msg_cat_cntr;
if (old_domain != new_domain && old_domain != _nl_default_default_domain)
free (old_domain);
}
__libc_rwlock_unlock (_nl_state_lock);
return new_domain;
}
#ifdef _LIBC
/* Alias for function name in GNU C Library. */
weak_alias (__textdomain, textdomain);
#endif
lib/malloc/Makefile.in
+6
View File
@@ -116,6 +116,12 @@ trace.o: ${srcdir}/imalloc.h
table.o: ${srcdir}/imalloc.h ${srcdir}/table.h
watch.o: ${srcdir}/imalloc.h ${srcdir}/watch.h
malloc.o: ${topdir}/bashintl.h ${BASHINCDIR}/gettext.h
stats.o: ${topdir}/bashintl.h ${BASHINCDIR}/gettext.h
trace.o: ${topdir}/bashintl.h ${BASHINCDIR}/gettext.h
table.o: ${topdir}/bashintl.h ${BASHINCDIR}/gettext.h
watch.o: ${topdir}/bashintl.h ${BASHINCDIR}/gettext.h
# Rules for deficient makes, like SunOS and Solaris
stub.o: stub.c
malloc.o: malloc.c
lib/malloc/OLD/gmalloc.c
+1486
View File
File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff
lib/malloc/OLD/ogmalloc.c
+1579
View File
File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff
lib/malloc/OLD/old-nmalloc.c
+890
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,890 @@
/* malloc.c - dynamic memory allocation for bash. */
/* Copyright (C) 1985, 1987, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA.
In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding! */
/*
* @(#)nmalloc.c 1 (Caltech) 2/21/82
*
* U of M Modified: 20 Jun 1983 ACT: strange hacks for Emacs
*
* Nov 1983, Mike@BRL, Added support for 4.1C/4.2 BSD.
*
* This is a very fast storage allocator. It allocates blocks of a small
* number of different sizes, and keeps free lists of each size. Blocks
* that don't exactly fit are passed up to the next larger size. In this
* implementation, the available sizes are (2^n)-4 (or -16) bytes long.
* This is designed for use in a program that uses vast quantities of
* memory, but bombs when it runs out. To make it a little better, it
* warns the user when he starts to get near the end.
*
* June 84, ACT: modified rcheck code to check the range given to malloc,
* rather than the range determined by the 2-power used.
*
* Jan 85, RMS: calls malloc_warning to issue warning on nearly full.
* No longer Emacs-specific; can serve as all-purpose malloc for GNU.
* You should call malloc_init to reinitialize after loading dumped Emacs.
* Call malloc_stats to get info on memory stats if MALLOC_STATS turned on.
* realloc knows how to return same block given, just changing its size,
* if the power of 2 is correct.
*/
#define MALLOC_STATS /* for the time being */
/*
* nextf[i] is the pointer to the next free block of size 2^(i+3). The
* smallest allocatable block is 8 bytes. The overhead information will
* go in the first int of the block, and the returned pointer will point
* to the second.
*/
/* XXX For the time being, until an autoconf test is created (ce has one) */
#define bits32_t int
#define u_bits32_t unsigned int
/* Define this to have free() write 0xcf into memory as it's freed, to
uncover callers that refer to freed memory. */
/* SCO 3.2v4 getcwd and possibly other libc routines fail with MEMSCRAMBLE */
#if !defined (NO_MEMSCRAMBLE)
# define MEMSCRAMBLE
#endif
#if defined (HAVE_CONFIG_H)
# include <config.h>
#endif /* HAVE_CONFIG_H */
#if defined (HAVE_UNISTD_H)
# include <unistd.h>
#endif
/* Determine which kind of system this is. */
#if defined (SHELL)
# include "bashtypes.h"
#else
# include <sys/types.h>
#endif
#include <signal.h>
#if defined (HAVE_STRING_H)
# include <string.h>
#else
# include <strings.h>
#endif
#if defined (MALLOC_STATS) || !defined (botch)
# include <stdio.h>
#endif /* MALLOC_STATS || !botch */
/* Define getpagesize () if the system does not. */
#ifndef HAVE_GETPAGESIZE
# include "getpagesize.h"
#endif
#if __GNUC__ > 1
# define FASTCOPY(s, d, n) __builtin_memcpy (d, s, n)
#else /* !__GNUC__ */
# if !defined (HAVE_BCOPY)
# if !defined (HAVE_MEMMOVE)
# define FASTCOPY(s, d, n) memcpy (d, s, n)
# else
# define FASTCOPY(s, d, n) memmove (d, s, n)
# endif /* !HAVE_MEMMOVE */
# else /* HAVE_BCOPY */
# define FASTCOPY(s, d, n) bcopy (s, d, n)
# endif /* HAVE_BCOPY */
#endif /* !__GNUC__ */
#if !defined (NULL)
# define NULL 0
#endif
#define NBUCKETS 30
#define ISALLOC ((char) 0xf7) /* magic byte that implies allocation */
#define ISFREE ((char) 0x54) /* magic byte that implies free block */
/* this is for error checking only */
#define ISMEMALIGN ((char) 0xd6) /* Stored before the value returned by
memalign, with the rest of the word
being the distance to the true
beginning of the block. */
#if !defined (SBRK_DECLARED)
extern char *sbrk ();
#endif /* !SBRK_DECLARED */
#ifdef MALLOC_STATS
/*
* NMALLOC[i] is the difference between the number of mallocs and frees
* for a given block size. TMALLOC[i] is the total number of mallocs for
* a given block size. NMORECORE[i] is the total number of calls to
* morecore(i). NMAL and NFRE are counts of the number of calls to malloc()
* and free(), respectively. NREALLOC is the total number of calls to
* realloc(); NRCOPY is the number of times realloc() had to allocate new
* memory and copy to it. NRECURSE is a count of the number of recursive
* calls to malloc() for the same bucket size, which can be caused by calls
* to malloc() from a signal handler. NSBRK is the number of calls to sbrk()
* (whether by morecore() or for alignment); TSBRK is the total number of
* bytes requested from the kernel with sbrk(). BYTESUSED is the total
* number of bytes consumed by blocks currently in used; BYTESFREE is the
* total number of bytes currently on all of the free lists. NBSPLIT is
* the number of times a larger block was split to satisfy a smaller request.
* NBCOALESCE is the number of times two adjacent smaller blocks off the free
* list were combined to satisfy a larger request.
*/
struct _malstats {
int nmalloc[NBUCKETS];
int tmalloc[NBUCKETS];
int nmorecore[NBUCKETS];
int nmal;
int nfre;
int nrealloc;
int nrcopy;
int nrecurse;
int nsbrk;
bits32_t tsbrk;
bits32_t bytesused;
bits32_t bytesfree;
int nbsplit;
int nbcoalesce;
};
static struct _malstats _mstats;
/* Return statistics describing allocation of blocks of size BLOCKSIZE.
NFREE is the number of free blocks for this allocation size. NUSED
is the number of blocks in use. NMAL is the number of requests for
blocks of size BLOCKSIZE. NMORECORE is the number of times we had
to call MORECORE to repopulate the free list for this bucket. */
struct bucket_stats {
u_bits32_t blocksize;
int nfree;
int nused;
int nmal;
int nmorecore;
};
#endif /* MALLOC_STATS */
/* We have a flag indicating whether memory is allocated, an index in
nextf[], a size field, and a sentinel value to determine whether or
not a caller wrote before the start of allocated memory; to realloc()
memory we either copy mh_nbytes or just change mh_nbytes if there is
enough room in the block for the new size. Range checking is always
done. */
struct mhead {
char mh_alloc; /* ISALLOC or ISFREE */ /* 1 */
char mh_index; /* index in nextf[] */ /* 1 */
/* Remainder are valid only when block is allocated */
u_bits32_t mh_nbytes; /* # of bytes allocated */ /* 4 */
u_bits16_t mh_magic2;/* should be == MAGIC2 */ /* 2 */
};
/* Access free-list pointer of a block.
It is stored at block + sizeof (char *).
This is not a field in the mhead structure
because we want sizeof (struct mhead)
to describe the overhead for when the block is in use,
and we do not want the free-list pointer to count in that. */
#define CHAIN(a) \
(*(struct mhead **) (sizeof (char *) + (char *) (a)))
#if defined (botch)
extern void botch ();
#else
static void
botch (s)
char *s;
{
fprintf (stderr, "\r\nmalloc: assertion botched: %s\r\n", s);
(void)fflush (stderr);
abort ();
}
#endif /* !botch */
#if !defined (__STRING)
# if defined (__STDC__)
# define __STRING(x) #x
# else
# define __STRING(x) "x"
# endif
#endif /* !__STRING */
/* To implement range checking, we write magic values in at the beginning
and end of each allocated block, and make sure they are undisturbed
whenever a free or a realloc occurs. */
/* Written in each of the 4 bytes following the block's real space */
#define MAGIC1 0x55
/* Written in the 2 bytes before the block's real space */
#define MAGIC2 0x5555
#define ASSERT(p) do { if (!(p)) botch(__STRING(p)); } while (0)
#define MSLOP 4 /* 4 bytes extra for MAGIC1s */
/* Minimum and maximum bucket indices for block splitting (and to bound
the search for a block to split). */
#define SPLIT_MIN 3
#define SPLIT_MID 9
#define SPLIT_MAX 12
/* Minimum and maximum bucket indices for block coalescing. */
#define COMBINE_MIN 6
#define COMBINE_MAX (pagebucket - 1)
#define MIN_COMBINE_FREE 4
/* nextf[i] is free list of blocks of size 2**(i + 3) */
static struct mhead *nextf[NBUCKETS];
/* busy[i] is nonzero while allocation of block size i is in progress. */
static char busy[NBUCKETS];
static int pagesz; /* system page size. */
static int pagebucket; /* bucket for requests a page in size */
#if 0
/* Coalesce two adjacent free blocks off the free list for size NU - 1,
as long as there are at least MIN_COMBINE_FREE free blocks and we
can find two adjacent free blocks. nextf[NU -1] is assumed to not
be busy; the caller (morecore()) checks for this. */
static void
bcoalesce (nu)
register int nu;
{
register struct mhead *mp, *mp1, *mp2;
register int nfree, nbuck;
unsigned long siz;
nbuck = nu - 1;
if (nextf[nbuck] == 0)
return;
nfree = 1;
mp1 = nextf[nbuck];
mp = CHAIN (mp1);
mp2 = (struct mhead *)0;
while (CHAIN (mp))
{
mp2 = mp1;
mp1 = mp;
mp = CHAIN (mp);
nfree++;
/* We may not want to run all the way through the free list here;
if we do not, we need to check a threshold value here and break
if nfree exceeds it. */
}
if (nfree < MIN_COMBINE_FREE)
return;
/* OK, now we have mp1 pointing to the block we want to add to nextf[NU].
CHAIN(mp2) must equal mp1. Check that mp1 and mp are adjacent. */
if (CHAIN(mp2) != mp1)
botch ("bcoalesce: CHAIN(mp2) != mp1");
siz = 1 << (nbuck + 3);
if (CHAIN (mp1) != (struct mhead *)((char *)mp1 + siz))
return; /* not adjacent */
#ifdef MALLOC_STATS
_mstats.nbcoalesce++;
#endif
/* Since they are adjacent, remove them from the free list */
CHAIN (mp2) = CHAIN (mp);
/* And add the combined two blocks to nextf[NU]. */
mp1->mh_alloc = ISFREE;
mp1->mh_index = nu;
CHAIN (mp1) = nextf[nu];
nextf[nu] = mp1;
}
#endif
/* Split a block at index > NU (but less than SPLIT_MAX) into a set of
blocks of the correct size, and attach them to nextf[NU]. nextf[NU]
is assumed to be empty. Must be called with signals blocked (e.g.,
by morecore()). */
static void
bsplit (nu)
register int nu;
{
register struct mhead *mp;
int nbuck, nblks;
unsigned long siz;
if (nu >= SPLIT_MID)
{
for (nbuck = SPLIT_MAX; nbuck > nu; nbuck--)
{
if (busy[nbuck] || nextf[nbuck] == 0)
continue;
break;
}
}
else
{
for (nbuck = nu + 1; nbuck <= SPLIT_MAX; nbuck++)
{
if (busy[nbuck] || nextf[nbuck] == 0)
continue;
break;
}
}
if (nbuck > SPLIT_MAX || nbuck <= nu)
return;
/* XXX might want to split only if nextf[nbuck] has >= 2 blocks free
and nbuck is below some threshold. */
#ifdef MALLOC_STATS
_mstats.nbsplit++;
#endif
/* Figure out how many blocks we'll get. */
siz = (1 << (nu + 3));
nblks = (1 << (nbuck + 3)) / siz;
/* Remove the block from the chain of larger blocks. */
mp = nextf[nbuck];
nextf[nbuck] = CHAIN (mp);
/* Split the block and put it on the requested chain. */
nextf[nu] = mp;
while (1)
{
mp->mh_alloc = ISFREE;
mp->mh_index = nu;
if (--nblks <= 0) break;
CHAIN (mp) = (struct mhead *)((char *)mp + siz);
mp = (struct mhead *)((char *)mp + siz);
}
CHAIN (mp) = 0;
}
static void
morecore (nu) /* ask system for more memory */
register int nu; /* size index to get more of */
{
register struct mhead *mp;
register int nblks;
register long siz;
long sbrk_amt; /* amount to get via sbrk() */
/* Block all signals in case we are executed from a signal handler. */
#if defined (HAVE_BSD_SIGNALS)
int oldmask;
oldmask = sigsetmask (-1);
#else
# if defined (HAVE_POSIX_SIGNALS)
sigset_t set, oset;
sigfillset (&set);
sigemptyset (&oset);
sigprocmask (SIG_BLOCK, &set, &oset);
# endif /* HAVE_POSIX_SIGNALS */
#endif /* HAVE_BSD_SIGNALS */
siz = 1 << (nu + 3); /* size of desired block for nextf[nu] */
if (siz < 0)
return; /* oops */
#ifdef MALLOC_STATS
_mstats.nmorecore[nu]++;
#endif
/* Try to split a larger block here, if we're within the range of sizes
to split. */
if (nu >= SPLIT_MIN && nu < SPLIT_MAX)
{
bsplit (nu);
if (nextf[nu] != 0)
goto morecore_done;
}
#if 0
/* Try to coalesce two adjacent blocks from the free list on nextf[nu - 1],
if we can, and we're withing the range of the block coalescing limits. */
if (nu >= COMBINE_MIN && nu < COMBINE_MAX && busy[nu - 1] == 0 && nextf[nu - 1])
{
bcoalesce (nu);
if (nextf[nu] != 0)
goto morecore_done;
}
#endif
/* Take at least a page, and figure out how many blocks of the requested
size we're getting. */
if (siz <= pagesz)
{
sbrk_amt = pagesz;
nblks = sbrk_amt / siz;
}
else
{
/* We always want to request an integral multiple of the page size
from the kernel, so let's compute whether or not `siz' is such
an amount. If it is, we can just request it. If not, we want
the smallest integral multiple of pagesize that is larger than
`siz' and will satisfy the request. */
sbrk_amt = siz % pagesz;
if (sbrk_amt == 0)
sbrk_amt = siz;
else
sbrk_amt = siz + pagesz - sbrk_amt;
nblks = 1;
}
#ifdef MALLOC_STATS
_mstats.nsbrk++;
_mstats.tsbrk += sbrk_amt;
#endif
mp = (struct mhead *) sbrk (sbrk_amt);
/* Totally out of memory. */
if ((long)mp == -1)
return;
/* shouldn't happen, but just in case */
if ((long)mp & 7)
{
mp = (struct mhead *) (((long)mp + 8) & ~7);
nblks--;
}
/* save new header and link the nblks blocks together */
nextf[nu] = mp;
while (1)
{
mp->mh_alloc = ISFREE;
mp->mh_index = nu;
if (--nblks <= 0) break;
CHAIN (mp) = (struct mhead *)((char *)mp + siz);
mp = (struct mhead *)((char *)mp + siz);
}
CHAIN (mp) = 0;
morecore_done:
#if defined (HAVE_BSD_SIGNALS)
sigsetmask (oldmask);
#else
# if defined (HAVE_POSIX_SIGNALS)
sigprocmask (SIG_SETMASK, &oset, (sigset_t *)NULL);
# endif
#endif /* HAVE_BSD_SIGNALS */
}
#if defined (MEMSCRAMBLE) || !defined (NO_CALLOC)
static char *
zmemset (s, c, n)
char *s;
int c;
register int n;
{
register char *sp;
sp = s;
while (--n >= 0)
*sp++ = c;
return (s);
}
#endif /* MEMSCRAMBLE || !NO_CALLOC */
static void
malloc_debug_dummy ()
{
;
}
char *
malloc (n) /* get a block */
size_t n;
{
register struct mhead *p;
register long nbytes;
register int nunits;
/* Get the system page size and align break pointer so everything will
be page-aligned. The page size must be at least 1K -- anything
smaller is increased. */
if (pagesz == 0)
{
register long sbrk_needed;
pagesz = getpagesize ();
if (pagesz < 1024)
pagesz = 1024;
/* OK, how much do we need to allocate to make things page-aligned?
This partial page is wasted space. Once we figure out how much
to advance the break pointer, go ahead and do it. */
sbrk_needed = pagesz - ((long)sbrk (0) & (pagesz - 1)); /* sbrk(0) % pagesz */
if (sbrk_needed < 0)
sbrk_needed += pagesz;
/* Now allocate the wasted space. */
if (sbrk_needed)
{
#ifdef MALLOC_STATS
_mstats.nsbrk++;
_mstats.tsbrk += sbrk_needed;
#endif
if ((long)sbrk (sbrk_needed) == -1)
return (NULL);
}
nunits = 0;
nbytes = 8;
while (pagesz > nbytes)
{
nbytes <<= 1;
nunits++;
}
pagebucket = nunits;
}
/* Figure out how many bytes are required, rounding up to the nearest
multiple of 4, then figure out which nextf[] area to use. Try to
be smart about where to start searching -- if the number of bytes
needed is greater than the page size, we can start at pagebucket. */
nbytes = (n + sizeof *p + MSLOP + 3) & ~3;
nunits = 0;
if (nbytes <= (pagesz >> 1))
{
register unsigned int shiftr;
shiftr = (nbytes - 1) >> 2; /* == (nbytes - 1) / 4 */
while (shiftr >>= 1) /* == (nbytes - 1) / {8,16,32,...} */
nunits++;
}
else
{
register u_bits32_t amt;
nunits = pagebucket;
amt = pagesz;
while (nbytes > amt)
{
amt <<= 1;
nunits++;
}
}
/* In case this is reentrant use of malloc from signal handler,
pick a block size that no other malloc level is currently
trying to allocate. That's the easiest harmless way not to
interfere with the other level of execution. */
#ifdef MALLOC_STATS
if (busy[nunits]) _mstats.nrecurse++;
#endif
while (busy[nunits]) nunits++;
busy[nunits] = 1;
/* If there are no blocks of the appropriate size, go get some */
if (nextf[nunits] == 0)
morecore (nunits);
/* Get one block off the list, and set the new list head */
if ((p = nextf[nunits]) == NULL)
{
busy[nunits] = 0;
return NULL;
}
nextf[nunits] = CHAIN (p);
busy[nunits] = 0;
/* Check for free block clobbered */
/* If not for this check, we would gobble a clobbered free chain ptr
and bomb out on the NEXT allocate of this size block */
if (p->mh_alloc != ISFREE || p->mh_index != nunits)
botch ("malloc: block on free list clobbered");
/* Fill in the info, and if range checking, set up the magic numbers */
p->mh_alloc = ISALLOC;
p->mh_nbytes = n;
p->mh_magic2 = MAGIC2;
{
register char *m = (char *) (p + 1) + n;
*m++ = MAGIC1, *m++ = MAGIC1, *m++ = MAGIC1, *m = MAGIC1;
}
#ifdef MEMSCRAMBLE
zmemset ((char *)(p + 1), 0xdf, n); /* scramble previous contents */
#endif
#ifdef MALLOC_STATS
_mstats.nmalloc[nunits]++;
_mstats.tmalloc[nunits]++;
_mstats.nmal++;
#endif /* MALLOC_STATS */
return (char *) (p + 1);
}
void
free (mem)
char *mem;
{
register struct mhead *p;
register char *ap;
register int nunits;
if ((ap = mem) == 0)
return;
p = (struct mhead *) ap - 1;
if (p->mh_alloc == ISMEMALIGN)
{
ap -= p->mh_nbytes;
p = (struct mhead *) ap - 1;
}
if (p->mh_alloc != ISALLOC)
{
if (p->mh_alloc == ISFREE)
botch ("free: called with already freed block argument");
else
botch ("free: called with unallocated block argument");
}
ASSERT (p->mh_magic2 == MAGIC2);
ap += p->mh_nbytes;
ASSERT (*ap++ == MAGIC1); ASSERT (*ap++ == MAGIC1);
ASSERT (*ap++ == MAGIC1); ASSERT (*ap == MAGIC1);
#ifdef MEMSCRAMBLE
zmemset (mem, 0xcf, p->mh_nbytes);
#endif
nunits = p->mh_index;
ASSERT (nunits < NBUCKETS);
p->mh_alloc = ISFREE;
/* Protect against signal handlers calling malloc. */
busy[nunits] = 1;
/* Put this block on the free list. */
CHAIN (p) = nextf[nunits];
nextf[nunits] = p;
busy[nunits] = 0;
#ifdef MALLOC_STATS
_mstats.nmalloc[nunits]--;
_mstats.nfre++;
#endif /* MALLOC_STATS */
}
char *
realloc (mem, n)
char *mem;
register size_t n;
{
register struct mhead *p;
register u_bits32_t tocopy;
register unsigned int nbytes;
register int nunits;
register char *m;
#ifdef MALLOC_STATS
_mstats.nrealloc++;
#endif
if (n == 0)
{
free (mem);
return (NULL);
}
if ((p = (struct mhead *) mem) == 0)
return malloc (n);
p--;
nunits = p->mh_index;
ASSERT (p->mh_alloc == ISALLOC);
ASSERT (p->mh_magic2 == MAGIC2);
m = mem + (tocopy = p->mh_nbytes);
ASSERT (*m++ == MAGIC1); ASSERT (*m++ == MAGIC1);
ASSERT (*m++ == MAGIC1); ASSERT (*m == MAGIC1);
/* See if desired size rounds to same power of 2 as actual size. */
nbytes = (n + sizeof *p + MSLOP + 7) & ~7;
/* If ok, use the same block, just marking its size as changed. */
if (nbytes > (4 << nunits) && nbytes <= (8 << nunits))
{
m = mem + tocopy;
*m++ = 0; *m++ = 0; *m++ = 0; *m++ = 0;
p->mh_nbytes = n;
m = mem + n;
*m++ = MAGIC1; *m++ = MAGIC1; *m++ = MAGIC1; *m++ = MAGIC1;
return mem;
}
#ifdef MALLOC_STATS
_mstats.nrcopy++;
#endif
if (n < tocopy)
tocopy = n;
if ((m = malloc (n)) == 0)
return 0;
FASTCOPY (mem, m, tocopy);
free (mem);
return m;
}
char *
memalign (alignment, size)
unsigned int alignment;
size_t size;
{
register char *ptr;
register char *aligned;
register struct mhead *p;
ptr = malloc (size + alignment);
if (ptr == 0)
return 0;
/* If entire block has the desired alignment, just accept it. */
if (((int) ptr & (alignment - 1)) == 0)
return ptr;
/* Otherwise, get address of byte in the block that has that alignment. */
aligned = (char *) (((int) ptr + alignment - 1) & -alignment);
/* Store a suitable indication of how to free the block,
so that free can find the true beginning of it. */
p = (struct mhead *) aligned - 1;
p->mh_nbytes = aligned - ptr;
p->mh_alloc = ISMEMALIGN;
return aligned;
}
#if !defined (HPUX)
/* This runs into trouble with getpagesize on HPUX, and Multimax machines.
Patching out seems cleaner than the ugly fix needed. */
#if defined (__STDC__)
void *
#else
char *
#endif
valloc (size)
size_t size;
{
return memalign (getpagesize (), size);
}
#endif /* !HPUX */
#ifndef NO_CALLOC
char *
calloc (n, s)
size_t n, s;
{
size_t total;
char *result;
total = n * s;
result = malloc (total);
if (result)
zmemset (result, 0, total);
return result;
}
void
cfree (p)
char *p;
{
free (p);
}
#endif /* !NO_CALLOC */
#ifdef MALLOC_STATS
struct bucket_stats
malloc_bucket_stats (size)
int size;
{
struct bucket_stats v;
register struct mhead *p;
v.nfree = 0;
if (size < 0 || size >= NBUCKETS)
{
v.blocksize = 0;
v.nused = v.nmal = 0;
return v;
}
v.blocksize = 1 << (size + 3);
v.nused = _mstats.nmalloc[size];
v.nmal = _mstats.tmalloc[size];
v.nmorecore = _mstats.nmorecore[size];
for (p = nextf[size]; p; p = CHAIN (p))
v.nfree++;
return v;
}
/* Return a copy of _MSTATS, with two additional fields filled in:
BYTESFREE is the total number of bytes on free lists. BYTESUSED
is the total number of bytes in use. These two fields are fairly
expensive to compute, so we do it only when asked to. */
struct _malstats
malloc_stats ()
{
struct _malstats result;
struct bucket_stats v;
register int i;
result = _mstats;
result.bytesused = result.bytesfree = 0;
for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
{
v = malloc_bucket_stats (i);
result.bytesfree += v.nfree * v.blocksize;
result.bytesused += v.nused * v.blocksize;
}
return (result);
}
void
print_malloc_stats (s)
char *s;
{
register int i;
int totused, totfree;
struct bucket_stats v;
fprintf (stderr, "Memory allocation statistics: %s\n\tsize\tfree\tin use\ttotal\tmorecore\n", s ? s : "");
for (i = totused = totfree = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
{
v = malloc_bucket_stats (i);
fprintf (stderr, "%12lu\t%4d\t%6d\t%5d\t%8d\n", v.blocksize, v.nfree, v.nused, v.nmal, v.nmorecore);
totfree += v.nfree * v.blocksize;
totused += v.nused * v.blocksize;
}
fprintf (stderr, "\nTotal bytes in use: %d, total bytes free: %d\n",
totused, totfree);
fprintf (stderr, "Total mallocs: %d, total frees: %d, total reallocs: %d (%d copies)\n",
_mstats.nmal, _mstats.nfre, _mstats.nrealloc, _mstats.nrcopy);
fprintf (stderr, "Total sbrks: %d, total bytes via sbrk: %d\n",
_mstats.nsbrk, _mstats.tsbrk);
fprintf (stderr, "Total blocks split: %d, total block coalesces: %d\n",
_mstats.nbsplit, _mstats.nbcoalesce);
}
#endif /* MALLOC_STATS */
lib/malloc/OLD/omalloc.c
+759
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,759 @@
/* dynamic memory allocation for GNU. */
/* Copyright (C) 1985, 1987 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA.
In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding! */
/*
* @(#)nmalloc.c 1 (Caltech) 2/21/82
*
* U of M Modified: 20 Jun 1983 ACT: strange hacks for Emacs
*
* Nov 1983, Mike@BRL, Added support for 4.1C/4.2 BSD.
*
* This is a very fast storage allocator. It allocates blocks of a small
* number of different sizes, and keeps free lists of each size. Blocks
* that don't exactly fit are passed up to the next larger size. In this
* implementation, the available sizes are (2^n)-4 (or -16) bytes long.
* This is designed for use in a program that uses vast quantities of
* memory, but bombs when it runs out. To make it a little better, it
* warns the user when he starts to get near the end.
*
* June 84, ACT: modified rcheck code to check the range given to malloc,
* rather than the range determined by the 2-power used.
*
* Jan 85, RMS: calls malloc_warning to issue warning on nearly full.
* No longer Emacs-specific; can serve as all-purpose malloc for GNU.
* You should call malloc_init to reinitialize after loading dumped Emacs.
* Call malloc_stats to get info on memory stats if MSTATS turned on.
* realloc knows how to return same block given, just changing its size,
* if the power of 2 is correct.
*/
/*
* nextf[i] is the pointer to the next free block of size 2^(i+3). The
* smallest allocatable block is 8 bytes. The overhead information will
* go in the first int of the block, and the returned pointer will point
* to the second.
*
#ifdef MSTATS
* nmalloc[i] is the difference between the number of mallocs and frees
* for a given block size.
#endif
*/
/* Define this to have free() write 0xcf into memory as it's freed, to
uncover callers that refer to freed memory. */
/* SCO 3.2v4 getcwd and possibly other libc routines fail with MEMSCRAMBLE */
#if !defined (NO_MEMSCRAMBLE)
# define MEMSCRAMBLE
#endif
#if defined (emacs) || defined (HAVE_CONFIG_H)
# include <config.h>
#endif /* emacs */
#if defined (HAVE_UNISTD_H)
# include <unistd.h>
#endif
/* Determine which kind of system this is. */
#if defined (SHELL)
# include "bashtypes.h"
#else
# include <sys/types.h>
#endif
#include <signal.h>
/* Define getpagesize () if the system does not. */
#ifndef HAVE_GETPAGESIZE
# include "getpagesize.h"
#endif
#if defined (HAVE_RESOURCE)
# include <sys/time.h>
# include <sys/resource.h>
#endif /* HAVE_RESOURCE */
/* Check for the needed symbols. If they aren't present, this
system's <sys/resource.h> isn't very useful to us. */
#if !defined (RLIMIT_DATA)
# undef HAVE_RESOURCE
#endif
#if __GNUC__ > 1
# define FASTCOPY(s, d, n) __builtin_memcpy (d, s, n)
#else /* !__GNUC__ */
# if !defined (HAVE_BCOPY)
# if !defined (HAVE_MEMMOVE)
# define FASTCOPY(s, d, n) memcpy (d, s, n)
# else
# define FASTCOPY(s, d, n) memmove (d, s, n)
# endif /* !HAVE_MEMMOVE */
# else /* HAVE_BCOPY */
# define FASTCOPY(s, d, n) bcopy (s, d, n)
# endif /* HAVE_BCOPY */
#endif /* !__GNUC__ */
#if !defined (NULL)
# define NULL 0
#endif
#define start_of_data() &etext
#define ISALLOC ((char) 0xf7) /* magic byte that implies allocation */
#define ISFREE ((char) 0x54) /* magic byte that implies free block */
/* this is for error checking only */
#define ISMEMALIGN ((char) 0xd6) /* Stored before the value returned by
memalign, with the rest of the word
being the distance to the true
beginning of the block. */
extern char etext;
#if !defined (SBRK_DECLARED)
extern char *sbrk ();
#endif /* !SBRK_DECLARED */
/* These two are for user programs to look at, when they are interested. */
unsigned int malloc_sbrk_used; /* amount of data space used now */
unsigned int malloc_sbrk_unused; /* amount more we can have */
/* start of data space; can be changed by calling init_malloc */
static char *data_space_start;
static void get_lim_data ();
#ifdef MSTATS
static int nmalloc[30];
static int nmal, nfre;
#endif /* MSTATS */
/* If range checking is not turned on, all we have is a flag indicating
whether memory is allocated, an index in nextf[], and a size field; to
realloc() memory we copy either size bytes or 1<<(index+3) bytes depending
on whether the former can hold the exact size (given the value of
'index'). If range checking is on, we always need to know how much space
is allocated, so the 'size' field is never used. */
struct mhead {
char mh_alloc; /* ISALLOC or ISFREE */
char mh_index; /* index in nextf[] */
/* Remainder are valid only when block is allocated */
unsigned short mh_size; /* size, if < 0x10000 */
#ifdef RCHECK
unsigned int mh_nbytes; /* number of bytes allocated */
int mh_magic4; /* should be == MAGIC4 */
#endif /* RCHECK */
};
/* Access free-list pointer of a block.
It is stored at block + 4.
This is not a field in the mhead structure
because we want sizeof (struct mhead)
to describe the overhead for when the block is in use,
and we do not want the free-list pointer to count in that. */
#define CHAIN(a) \
(*(struct mhead **) (sizeof (char *) + (char *) (a)))
#ifdef RCHECK
# include <stdio.h>
# if !defined (botch)
# define botch(x) abort ()
# else
extern void botch();
# endif /* botch */
# if !defined (__STRING)
# if defined (__STDC__)
# define __STRING(x) #x
# else
# define __STRING(x) "x"
# endif
# endif
/* To implement range checking, we write magic values in at the beginning
and end of each allocated block, and make sure they are undisturbed
whenever a free or a realloc occurs. */
/* Written in each of the 4 bytes following the block's real space */
# define MAGIC1 0x55
/* Written in the 4 bytes before the block's real space */
# define MAGIC4 0x55555555
# define ASSERT(p) if (!(p)) botch(__STRING(p)); else
# define EXTRA 4 /* 4 bytes extra for MAGIC1s */
#else /* !RCHECK */
# define ASSERT(p)
# define EXTRA 0
#endif /* RCHECK */
/* nextf[i] is free list of blocks of size 2**(i + 3) */
static struct mhead *nextf[30];
/* busy[i] is nonzero while allocation of block size i is in progress. */
static char busy[30];
/* Number of bytes of writable memory we can expect to be able to get */
static unsigned int lim_data;
/* Level number of warnings already issued.
0 -- no warnings issued.
1 -- 75% warning already issued.
2 -- 85% warning already issued.
*/
static int warnlevel;
/* Function to call to issue a warning;
0 means don't issue them. */
static void (*warnfunction) ();
/* nonzero once initial bunch of free blocks made */
static int gotpool;
char *_malloc_base;
static void getpool ();
/* Cause reinitialization based on job parameters;
also declare where the end of pure storage is. */
void
malloc_init (start, warnfun)
char *start;
void (*warnfun) ();
{
if (start)
data_space_start = start;
lim_data = 0;
warnlevel = 0;
warnfunction = warnfun;
}
/* Return the maximum size to which MEM can be realloc'd
without actually requiring copying. */
int
malloc_usable_size (mem)
char *mem;
{
int blocksize = 8 << (((struct mhead *) mem) - 1) -> mh_index;
return blocksize - sizeof (struct mhead) - EXTRA;
}
static void
morecore (nu) /* ask system for more memory */
register int nu; /* size index to get more of */
{
register char *cp;
register int nblks;
register unsigned int siz;
/* Block all signals in case we are executed from a signal handler. */
#if defined (HAVE_BSD_SIGNALS)
int oldmask;
oldmask = sigsetmask (-1);
#else
# if defined (HAVE_POSIX_SIGNALS)
sigset_t set, oset;
sigfillset (&set);
sigemptyset (&oset);
sigprocmask (SIG_BLOCK, &set, &oset);
# endif /* HAVE_POSIX_SIGNALS */
#endif /* HAVE_BSD_SIGNALS */
if (!data_space_start)
{
data_space_start = start_of_data ();
}
if (lim_data == 0)
get_lim_data ();
/* On initial startup, get two blocks of each size up to 1k bytes */
if (!gotpool)
{ getpool (); getpool (); gotpool = 1; }
/* Find current end of memory and issue warning if getting near max */
cp = sbrk (0);
siz = cp - data_space_start;
malloc_sbrk_used = siz;
malloc_sbrk_unused = lim_data - siz;
if (warnfunction)
switch (warnlevel)
{
case 0:
if (siz > (lim_data / 4) * 3)
{
warnlevel++;
(*warnfunction) ("Warning: past 75% of memory limit");
}
break;
case 1:
if (siz > (lim_data / 20) * 17)
{
warnlevel++;
(*warnfunction) ("Warning: past 85% of memory limit");
}
break;
case 2:
if (siz > (lim_data / 20) * 19)
{
warnlevel++;
(*warnfunction) ("Warning: past 95% of memory limit");
}
break;
}
if ((int) cp & 0x3ff) /* land on 1K boundaries */
sbrk (1024 - ((int) cp & 0x3ff));
/* Take at least 2k, and figure out how many blocks of the desired size
we're about to get */
nblks = 1;
if ((siz = nu) < 8)
nblks = 1 << ((siz = 8) - nu);
if ((cp = sbrk (1 << (siz + 3))) == (char *) -1)
return; /* no more room! */
if ((int) cp & 7)
{ /* shouldn't happen, but just in case */
cp = (char *) (((int) cp + 8) & ~7);
nblks--;
}
/* save new header and link the nblks blocks together */
nextf[nu] = (struct mhead *) cp;
siz = 1 << (nu + 3);
while (1)
{
((struct mhead *) cp) -> mh_alloc = ISFREE;
((struct mhead *) cp) -> mh_index = nu;
if (--nblks <= 0) break;
CHAIN ((struct mhead *) cp) = (struct mhead *) (cp + siz);
cp += siz;
}
CHAIN ((struct mhead *) cp) = 0;
#if defined (HAVE_BSD_SIGNALS)
sigsetmask (oldmask);
#else
# if defined (HAVE_POSIX_SIGNALS)
sigprocmask (SIG_SETMASK, &oset, (sigset_t *)NULL);
# endif
#endif /* HAVE_BSD_SIGNALS */
}
static void
getpool ()
{
register int nu;
register char *cp = sbrk (0);
if ((int) cp & 0x3ff) /* land on 1K boundaries */
sbrk (1024 - ((int) cp & 0x3ff));
/* Record address of start of space allocated by malloc. */
if (_malloc_base == 0)
_malloc_base = cp;
/* Get 2k of storage */
cp = sbrk (04000);
if (cp == (char *) -1)
return;
/* Divide it into an initial 8-word block
plus one block of size 2**nu for nu = 3 ... 10. */
CHAIN (cp) = nextf[0];
nextf[0] = (struct mhead *) cp;
((struct mhead *) cp) -> mh_alloc = ISFREE;
((struct mhead *) cp) -> mh_index = 0;
cp += 8;
for (nu = 0; nu < 7; nu++)
{
CHAIN (cp) = nextf[nu];
nextf[nu] = (struct mhead *) cp;
((struct mhead *) cp) -> mh_alloc = ISFREE;
((struct mhead *) cp) -> mh_index = nu;
cp += 8 << nu;
}
}
#if defined (MEMSCRAMBLE) || !defined (NO_CALLOC)
static char *
zmemset (s, c, n)
char *s;
int c;
register int n;
{
register char *sp;
sp = s;
while (--n >= 0)
*sp++ = c;
return (s);
}
#endif /* MEMSCRAMBLE || !NO_CALLOC */
char *
malloc (n) /* get a block */
unsigned int n;
{
register struct mhead *p;
register unsigned int nbytes;
register int nunits = 0;
/* Figure out how many bytes are required, rounding up to the nearest
multiple of 4, then figure out which nextf[] area to use */
nbytes = (n + sizeof *p + EXTRA + 3) & ~3;
{
register unsigned int shiftr = (nbytes - 1) >> 2;
while (shiftr >>= 1)
nunits++;
}
/* In case this is reentrant use of malloc from signal handler,
pick a block size that no other malloc level is currently
trying to allocate. That's the easiest harmless way not to
interfere with the other level of execution. */
while (busy[nunits]) nunits++;
busy[nunits] = 1;
/* If there are no blocks of the appropriate size, go get some */
/* COULD SPLIT UP A LARGER BLOCK HERE ... ACT */
if (nextf[nunits] == 0)
morecore (nunits);
/* Get one block off the list, and set the new list head */
if ((p = nextf[nunits]) == 0)
{
busy[nunits] = 0;
return 0;
}
nextf[nunits] = CHAIN (p);
busy[nunits] = 0;
/* Check for free block clobbered */
/* If not for this check, we would gobble a clobbered free chain ptr */
/* and bomb out on the NEXT allocate of this size block */
if (p -> mh_alloc != ISFREE || p -> mh_index != nunits)
#ifdef RCHECK
botch ("block on free list clobbered");
#else /* not RCHECK */
abort ();
#endif /* not RCHECK */
/* Fill in the info, and if range checking, set up the magic numbers */
p -> mh_alloc = ISALLOC;
#ifdef RCHECK
p -> mh_nbytes = n;
p -> mh_magic4 = MAGIC4;
{
register char *m = (char *) (p + 1) + n;
*m++ = MAGIC1, *m++ = MAGIC1, *m++ = MAGIC1, *m = MAGIC1;
}
#else /* not RCHECK */
p -> mh_size = n;
#endif /* not RCHECK */
#ifdef MEMSCRAMBLE
zmemset ((char *)(p + 1), 0xdf, n); /* scramble previous contents */
#endif
#ifdef MSTATS
nmalloc[nunits]++;
nmal++;
#endif /* MSTATS */
return (char *) (p + 1);
}
void
free (mem)
char *mem;
{
register struct mhead *p;
{
register char *ap = mem;
if (ap == 0)
return;
p = (struct mhead *) ap - 1;
if (p -> mh_alloc == ISMEMALIGN)
{
#ifdef RCHECK
ap -= p->mh_nbytes;
#else
ap -= p->mh_size; /* XXX */
#endif
p = (struct mhead *) ap - 1;
}
#ifndef RCHECK
if (p -> mh_alloc != ISALLOC)
abort ();
#else /* RCHECK */
if (p -> mh_alloc != ISALLOC)
{
if (p -> mh_alloc == ISFREE)
botch ("free: Called with already freed block argument\n");
else
botch ("free: Called with unallocated block argument\n");
}
ASSERT (p -> mh_magic4 == MAGIC4);
ap += p -> mh_nbytes;
ASSERT (*ap++ == MAGIC1); ASSERT (*ap++ == MAGIC1);
ASSERT (*ap++ == MAGIC1); ASSERT (*ap == MAGIC1);
#endif /* RCHECK */
}
#ifdef MEMSCRAMBLE
{
register int n;
#ifdef RCHECK
n = p->mh_nbytes;
#else /* not RCHECK */
n = p->mh_size;
#endif /* not RCHECK */
zmemset (mem, 0xcf, n);
}
#endif
{
register int nunits = p -> mh_index;
ASSERT (nunits <= 29);
p -> mh_alloc = ISFREE;
/* Protect against signal handlers calling malloc. */
busy[nunits] = 1;
/* Put this block on the free list. */
CHAIN (p) = nextf[nunits];
nextf[nunits] = p;
busy[nunits] = 0;
#ifdef MSTATS
nmalloc[nunits]--;
nfre++;
#endif /* MSTATS */
}
}
char *
realloc (mem, n)
char *mem;
register unsigned int n;
{
register struct mhead *p;
register unsigned int tocopy;
register unsigned int nbytes;
register int nunits;
if ((p = (struct mhead *) mem) == 0)
return malloc (n);
p--;
nunits = p -> mh_index;
ASSERT (p -> mh_alloc == ISALLOC);
#ifdef RCHECK
ASSERT (p -> mh_magic4 == MAGIC4);
{
register char *m = mem + (tocopy = p -> mh_nbytes);
ASSERT (*m++ == MAGIC1); ASSERT (*m++ == MAGIC1);
ASSERT (*m++ == MAGIC1); ASSERT (*m == MAGIC1);
}
#else /* not RCHECK */
if (p -> mh_index >= 13)
tocopy = (1 << (p -> mh_index + 3)) - sizeof *p;
else
tocopy = p -> mh_size;
#endif /* not RCHECK */
/* See if desired size rounds to same power of 2 as actual size. */
nbytes = (n + sizeof *p + EXTRA + 7) & ~7;
/* If ok, use the same block, just marking its size as changed. */
if (nbytes > (4 << nunits) && nbytes <= (8 << nunits))
{
#ifdef RCHECK
register char *m = mem + tocopy;
*m++ = 0; *m++ = 0; *m++ = 0; *m++ = 0;
p-> mh_nbytes = n;
m = mem + n;
*m++ = MAGIC1; *m++ = MAGIC1; *m++ = MAGIC1; *m++ = MAGIC1;
#else /* not RCHECK */
p -> mh_size = n;
#endif /* not RCHECK */
return mem;
}
if (n < tocopy)
tocopy = n;
{
register char *new;
if ((new = malloc (n)) == 0)
return 0;
FASTCOPY (mem, new, tocopy);
free (mem);
return new;
}
}
char *
memalign (alignment, size)
unsigned int alignment, size;
{
register char *ptr;
register char *aligned;
register struct mhead *p;
ptr = malloc (size + alignment);
if (ptr == 0)
return 0;
/* If entire block has the desired alignment, just accept it. */
if (((int) ptr & (alignment - 1)) == 0)
return ptr;
/* Otherwise, get address of byte in the block that has that alignment. */
aligned = (char *) (((int) ptr + alignment - 1) & -alignment);
/* Store a suitable indication of how to free the block,
so that free can find the true beginning of it. */
p = (struct mhead *) aligned - 1;
p -> mh_size = aligned - ptr;
p -> mh_alloc = ISMEMALIGN;
return aligned;
}
#if !defined (HPUX)
/* This runs into trouble with getpagesize on HPUX, and Multimax machines.
Patching out seems cleaner than the ugly fix needed. */
#if defined (__STDC__)
void *
#else
char *
#endif
valloc (size)
size_t size;
{
return memalign (getpagesize (), size);
}
#endif /* !HPUX */
#ifndef NO_CALLOC
char *
calloc (n, s)
size_t n, s;
{
size_t total;
char *result;
total = n * s;
result = malloc (total);
if (result)
zmemset (result, 0, total);
return result;
}
void
cfree (p)
char *p;
{
free (p);
}
#endif /* !NO_CALLOC */
#ifdef MSTATS
/* Return statistics describing allocation of blocks of size 2**n. */
struct mstats_value
{
int blocksize;
int nfree;
int nused;
};
struct mstats_value
malloc_stats (size)
int size;
{
struct mstats_value v;
register int i;
register struct mhead *p;
v.nfree = 0;
if (size < 0 || size >= 30)
{
v.blocksize = 0;
v.nused = 0;
return v;
}
v.blocksize = 1 << (size + 3);
v.nused = nmalloc[size];
for (p = nextf[size]; p; p = CHAIN (p))
v.nfree++;
return v;
}
#endif /* MSTATS */
/*
* This function returns the total number of bytes that the process
* will be allowed to allocate via the sbrk(2) system call. On
* BSD systems this is the total space allocatable to stack and
* data. On USG systems this is the data space only.
*/
#if !defined (HAVE_RESOURCE)
extern long ulimit ();
static void
get_lim_data ()
{
lim_data = ulimit (3, 0);
lim_data -= (long) data_space_start;
}
#else /* HAVE_RESOURCE */
static void
get_lim_data ()
{
struct rlimit XXrlimit;
getrlimit (RLIMIT_DATA, &XXrlimit);
#ifdef RLIM_INFINITY
lim_data = XXrlimit.rlim_cur & RLIM_INFINITY; /* soft limit */
#else
lim_data = XXrlimit.rlim_cur; /* soft limit */
#endif
}
#endif /* HAVE_RESOURCE */
lib/malloc/getpagesize.h
+1 -1
View File
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/* Emulation of getpagesize() for systems that need it.
Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Copyright (C) 1991-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
lib/malloc/imalloc.h
+7 -1
View File
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
/* imalloc.h -- internal malloc definitions shared by source files. */
/* Copyright (C) 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
/* Copyright (C) 2001-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
@@ -159,4 +159,10 @@ do { \
memcpy ((dest), (src), (nbytes)) \
} while(0)
#if defined (SHELL)
# include "bashintl.h"
#else
# define _(x) x
#endif
#endif /* _IMALLOC_H */
lib/malloc/malloc.c
+11 -11
View File
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
/* malloc.c - dynamic memory allocation for bash. */
/* Copyright (C) 1985, 1987, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
/* Copyright (C) 1985-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ botch (s, file, line)
const char *file;
int line;
{
fprintf (stderr, "malloc: failed assertion: %s\n", s);
fprintf (stderr, _("malloc: failed assertion: %s\n"), s);
(void)fflush (stderr);
abort ();
}
@@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ xbotch (mem, e, s, file, line)
const char *file;
int line;
{
fprintf (stderr, "\r\nmalloc: %s:%d: assertion botched\r\n",
fprintf (stderr, _("\r\nmalloc: %s:%d: assertion botched\r\n"),
file ? file : "unknown", line);
#ifdef MALLOC_REGISTER
if (mem != NULL && malloc_register)
@@ -737,7 +737,7 @@ internal_malloc (n, file, line, flags) /* get a block */
/* If not for this check, we would gobble a clobbered free chain ptr
and bomb out on the NEXT allocate of this size block */
if (p->mh_alloc != ISFREE || p->mh_index != nunits)
xbotch ((PTR_T)(p+1), 0, "malloc: block on free list clobbered", file, line);
xbotch ((PTR_T)(p+1), 0, _("malloc: block on free list clobbered"), file, line);
/* Fill in the info, and set up the magic numbers for range checking. */
p->mh_alloc = ISALLOC;
@@ -814,10 +814,10 @@ internal_free (mem, file, line, flags)
{
if (p->mh_alloc == ISFREE)
xbotch (mem, ERR_DUPFREE,
"free: called with already freed block argument", file, line);
_("free: called with already freed block argument"), file, line);
else
xbotch (mem, ERR_UNALLOC,
"free: called with unallocated block argument", file, line);
_("free: called with unallocated block argument"), file, line);
}
ASSERT (p->mh_magic2 == MAGIC2);
@@ -836,13 +836,13 @@ internal_free (mem, file, line, flags)
if (IN_BUCKET(nbytes, nunits) == 0)
xbotch (mem, ERR_UNDERFLOW,
"free: underflow detected; mh_nbytes out of range", file, line);
_("free: underflow detected; mh_nbytes out of range"), file, line);
ap += p->mh_nbytes;
z = mg.s;
*z++ = *ap++, *z++ = *ap++, *z++ = *ap++, *z++ = *ap++;
if (mg.i != p->mh_nbytes)
xbotch (mem, ERR_ASSERT_FAILED, "free: start and end chunk sizes differ", file, line);
xbotch (mem, ERR_ASSERT_FAILED, _("free: start and end chunk sizes differ"), file, line);
#if 1
if (nunits >= LESSCORE_MIN && ((char *)p + binsize(nunits) == memtop))
@@ -939,7 +939,7 @@ internal_realloc (mem, n, file, line, flags)
if (p->mh_alloc != ISALLOC)
xbotch (mem, ERR_UNALLOC,
"realloc: called with unallocated block argument", file, line);
_("realloc: called with unallocated block argument"), file, line);
ASSERT (p->mh_magic2 == MAGIC2);
nbytes = ALLOCATED_BYTES(p->mh_nbytes);
@@ -954,13 +954,13 @@ internal_realloc (mem, n, file, line, flags)
original number of bytes requested. */
if (IN_BUCKET(nbytes, nunits) == 0)
xbotch (mem, ERR_UNDERFLOW,
"realloc: underflow detected; mh_nbytes out of range", file, line);
_("realloc: underflow detected; mh_nbytes out of range"), file, line);
m = (char *)mem + (tocopy = p->mh_nbytes);
z = mg.s;
*z++ = *m++, *z++ = *m++, *z++ = *m++, *z++ = *m++;
if (mg.i != p->mh_nbytes)
xbotch (mem, ERR_ASSERT_FAILED, "realloc: start and end chunk sizes differ", file, line);
xbotch (mem, ERR_ASSERT_FAILED, _("realloc: start and end chunk sizes differ"), file, line);
#ifdef MALLOC_WATCH
if (_malloc_nwatch > 0)
lib/malloc/malloc.c.bad
+1216
View File
File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff
lib/malloc/malloc.c.save
+1213
View File
File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff
lib/malloc/memtest.c
+151
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
/*
* malloc test program.
*
* to build:
* make x.o
* gcc -g -o x x.o xmalloc.o lib/malloc/libmalloc.a
*/
/* Copyright (C) 2002-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
version.
Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with Bash; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#define USING_BASH_MALLOC
#define HAVE_STRINGIZE
#include "xmalloc.h"
int interrupt_immediately = 0;
static char xp[64];
main(int c, char **v)
{
char *p;
malloc_set_register(1);
#if 0
free (xp); /* free unallocated memory */
#endif
#if 0
p = xrealloc(xp, 128);
#endif
#if 0
/*
* request an amount so that the bucket changes when the malloc
* overhead is added to the requested size. This had better
* succeed.
*/
p = xmalloc(25);
p[0] = 'a';
p[1] = '\0';
free(p); /* sanity check on underflow checks in free() */
#endif
#if 0
p = xmalloc(28);
/* This works for little-endian machines like i386. */
p[-4] = '\7'; /* underflow */
p = xrealloc(p, 128); /* realloc corrupted memory */
#endif
#if 0
p = xmalloc(28);
/* This works for little-endian machines like i386. */
p[-4] = '\7'; /* underflow */
free(p);
#endif
#if 0
p = xmalloc(2);
free(p);
free(p); /* duplicate free */
#endif
#if 0
p = xmalloc(32);
free(p);
p = xrealloc(p, 128); /* realloc freed mem */
#endif
#if 0
p = xmalloc(64);
p[64] = '\0';
p = xrealloc(p, 128); /* overflow */
#endif
#if 0
p = xmalloc(64);
p[64] = '\0';
free(p); /* overflow */
#endif
#if 0
p = xmalloc(64);
p[-1] = 'a';
free (p); /* underflow */
#endif
#if 0
p = xmalloc(64);
p[-1] = 'a';
p = xrealloc(p, 129); /* underflow */
#endif
mregister_dump_table();
exit(0);
}
void
fatal_error(const char *format, ...)
{
va_list args;
fprintf(stderr, "malloc-test: ");
va_start(args, format);
vfprintf(stderr, format, args);
fprintf(stderr, "\n");
va_end(args);
exit(2);
}
void
programming_error(const char *format, ...)
{
va_list args;
fprintf(stderr, "malloc-test: ");
va_start(args, format);
vfprintf(stderr, format, args);
fprintf(stderr, "\n");
va_end(args);
abort();
}
int
signal_is_trapped(int n)
{
return 0;
}
lib/malloc/mstats.h
+1 -1
View File
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
/* mstats.h - definitions for malloc statistics */
/* Copyright (C) 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
/* Copyright (C) 2001-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
lib/malloc/shmalloc.h
+2 -1
View File
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
/* Functions (currently) for use by the shell to do malloc debugging and
tracking. */
/* Copyright (C) 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
/* Copyright (C) 2001-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@@ -53,6 +53,7 @@ extern PTR_T sh_valloc __P((size_t, const char *, int));
/* trace.c */
extern int malloc_set_trace __P((int));
extern void malloc_set_tracefp (); /* full prototype requires stdio.h */
extern void malloc_set_tracefn __P((char *, char *));
/* table.c */
extern void mregister_dump_table __P((void));
lib/malloc/stats.c
+33 -15
View File
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
/* stats.c - malloc statistics */
/* Copyright (C) 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
/* Copyright (C) 2001-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@@ -35,6 +35,8 @@ extern int malloc_free_blocks __P((int));
extern struct _malstats _mstats;
extern FILE *_imalloc_fopen __P((char *, char *, char *, char *, size_t));
struct bucket_stats
malloc_bucket_stats (size)
int size;
@@ -129,14 +131,37 @@ fprint_malloc_stats (s, fp)
_print_malloc_stats (s, fp);
}
#define TRACEROOT "/var/tmp/maltrace/trace."
static char mallbuf[1024];
#define TRACEROOT "/var/tmp/maltrace/stats."
void
trace_malloc_stats (s, fn)
char *s, *fn;
{
FILE *fp;
char defname[sizeof (TRACEROOT) + 64];
static char mallbuf[1024];
fp = _imalloc_fopen (s, fn, TRACEROOT, defname, sizeof (defname));
if (fp)
{
setvbuf (fp, mallbuf, _IOFBF, sizeof (mallbuf));
_print_malloc_stats (s, fp);
fflush(fp);
fclose(fp);
}
}
#endif /* MALLOC_STATS */
#if defined (MALLOC_STATS) || defined (MALLOC_TRACE)
FILE *
_imalloc_fopen (s, fn, def, defbuf, defsiz)
char *s;
char *fn;
char *def;
char *defbuf;
size_t defsiz;
{
char fname[1024];
long l;
FILE *fp;
@@ -144,8 +169,8 @@ trace_malloc_stats (s, fn)
l = (long)getpid ();
if (fn == 0)
{
sprintf (defname, "%s%ld", TRACEROOT, l);
fp = fopen(defname, "w");
sprintf (defbuf, "%s%ld", def, l);
fp = fopen(defbuf, "w");
}
else
{
@@ -171,14 +196,7 @@ trace_malloc_stats (s, fn)
*p = '\0';
fp = fopen (fname, "w");
}
if (fp)
{
setvbuf (fp, mallbuf, _IOFBF, sizeof (mallbuf));
_print_malloc_stats (s, fp);
fflush(fp);
fclose(fp);
}
}
#endif /* MALLOC_STATS */
return fp;
}
#endif /* MALLOC_STATS || MALLOC_TRACE */
lib/malloc/stub.c
+1 -1
View File
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
/* Copyright (C) 1993-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
/* Copyright (C) 1993-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
lib/malloc/table.c
+4 -4
View File
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
/* table.c - bookkeeping functions for allocated memory */
/* Copyright (C) 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
/* Copyright (C) 2001-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
@@ -172,14 +172,14 @@ mregister_alloc (tag, mem, size, file, line)
if (tentry == 0)
{
/* oops. table is full. punt. */
fprintf (stderr, "register_alloc: alloc table is full with FIND_ALLOC?\n");
fprintf (stderr, _("register_alloc: alloc table is full with FIND_ALLOC?\n"));
return;
}
if (tentry->flags & MT_ALLOC)
{
/* oops. bad bookkeeping. ignore for now */
fprintf (stderr, "register_alloc: %p already in table as allocated?\n", mem);
fprintf (stderr, _("register_alloc: %p already in table as allocated?\n"), mem);
}
tentry->mem = mem;
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ mregister_free (mem, size, file, line)
if (tentry->flags & MT_FREE)
{
/* oops. bad bookkeeping. ignore for now */
fprintf (stderr, "register_free: %p already in table as free?\n", mem);
fprintf (stderr, _("register_free: %p already in table as free?\n"), mem);
}
tentry->flags = MT_FREE;
lib/malloc/table.h
+1 -1
View File
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
/* table.h - definitions for tables for keeping track of allocated memory */
/* Copyright (C) 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
/* Copyright (C) 2001-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
lib/malloc/trace.c
+20 -1
View File
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
/* trace.c - tracing functions for malloc */
/* Copyright (C) 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
/* Copyright (C) 2001-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
@@ -29,6 +29,8 @@ extern int malloc_trace;
static int _mtrace_verbose = 0;
extern FILE *_imalloc_fopen __P((char *, char *, char *, char *, size_t));
#ifdef MALLOC_TRACE
FILE *_mtrace_fp = NULL;
@@ -101,3 +103,20 @@ malloc_trace_bin (n)
_malloc_trace_buckets[n] = 1;
#endif
}
#define TRACEROOT "/var/tmp/maltrace/trace."
void
malloc_set_tracefn (s, fn)
char *s;
char *fn;
{
#ifdef MALLOC_TRACE
FILE *fp;
char defname[sizeof (TRACEROOT) + 64];
fp = _imalloc_fopen (s, fn, TRACEROOT, defname, sizeof (defname));
if (fp)
malloc_set_tracefp (fp);
#endif
}
lib/malloc/watch.c
+7 -7
View File
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
/* watch.c - watchpoint functions for malloc */
/* Copyright (C) 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
/* Copyright (C) 2001-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
@@ -43,17 +43,17 @@ watch_warn (addr, file, line, type, data)
char *tag;
if (type == W_ALLOC)
tag = "allocated";
tag = _("allocated");
else if (type == W_FREE)
tag = "freed";
tag = _("freed");
else if (type == W_REALLOC)
tag = "requesting resize";
tag = _("requesting resize");
else if (type == W_RESIZED)
tag = "just resized";
tag = _("just resized");
else
tag = "bug: unknown operation";
tag = _("bug: unknown operation");
fprintf (stderr, "malloc: watch alert: %p %s ", addr, tag);
fprintf (stderr, _("malloc: watch alert: %p %s "), addr, tag);
if (data != (unsigned long)-1)
fprintf (stderr, "(size %lu) ", data);
fprintf (stderr, "from '%s:%d'\n", file ? file : "unknown", line);
lib/malloc/watch.h
+1 -1
View File
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
/* watch.h - definitions for tables for keeping track of allocated memory */
/* Copyright (C) 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
/* Copyright (C) 2001-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
lib/malloc/xmalloc.c
+1 -1
View File
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
/* xmalloc.c -- safe versions of malloc and realloc */
/* Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
/* Copyright (C) 1991-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of GNU Readline, a library for reading lines
of text with interactive input and history editing.
lib/posixheaders.old/ansi_stdlib.h
+41
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
/* ansi_stdlib.h -- An ANSI Standard stdlib.h. */
/* A minimal stdlib.h containing extern declarations for those functions
that bash uses. */
/* Copyright (C) 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
version.
Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with Bash; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */
#if !defined (_STDLIB_H_)
#define _STDLIB_H_ 1
/* String conversion functions. */
extern int atoi ();
extern long int atol ();
/* Memory allocation functions. */
extern char *malloc ();
extern char *realloc ();
extern void free ();
/* Other miscellaneous functions. */
extern void abort ();
extern void exit ();
extern char *getenv ();
extern void qsort ();
#endif /* _STDLIB_H */
lib/posixheaders.old/filecntl.h
+45
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
/* filecntl.h - Definitions to set file descriptors to close-on-exec. */
/* Copyright (C) 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
version.
Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with Bash; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */
#if !defined (_FILECNTL_H_)
#define _FILECNTL_H_
#include <fcntl.h>
/* Definitions to set file descriptors to close-on-exec, the Posix way. */
#if !defined (FD_CLOEXEC)
#define FD_CLOEXEC 1
#endif
#define FD_NCLOEXEC 0
#define SET_CLOSE_ON_EXEC(fd) (fcntl ((fd), F_SETFD, FD_CLOEXEC))
#define SET_OPEN_ON_EXEC(fd) (fcntl ((fd), F_SETFD, FD_NCLOEXEC))
/* How to open a file in non-blocking mode, the Posix.1 way. */
#if !defined (O_NONBLOCK)
# if defined (O_NDELAY)
# define O_NONBLOCK O_NDELAY
# else
# define O_NONBLOCK 0
# endif
#endif
#endif /* ! _FILECNTL_H_ */
lib/posixheaders.old/memalloc.h
+58
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
/* memalloc.h -- consolidate code for including alloca.h or malloc.h and
defining alloca. */
/* Copyright (C) 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
version.
Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with Bash; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */
#if !defined (_MEMALLOC_H_)
# define _MEMALLOC_H_
#if defined (sparc) && defined (sun) && !defined (HAVE_ALLOCA_H)
# define HAVE_ALLOCA_H
#endif
#if defined (__GNUC__) && !defined (HAVE_ALLOCA)
# define HAVE_ALLOCA
#endif
#if defined (HAVE_ALLOCA_H) && !defined (HAVE_ALLOCA)
# define HAVE_ALLOCA
#endif /* HAVE_ALLOCA_H && !HAVE_ALLOCA */
#if defined (__GNUC__) && !defined (C_ALLOCA)
# undef alloca
# define alloca __builtin_alloca
#else /* !__GNUC__ || C_ALLOCA */
# if defined (HAVE_ALLOCA_H) && !defined (C_ALLOCA)
# if defined (IBMESA)
# include <malloc.h>
# else /* !IBMESA */
# include <alloca.h>
# endif /* !IBMESA */
# else /* !HAVE_ALLOCA_H || C_ALLOCA */
# if defined (__hpux) && defined (__STDC__) && !defined (alloca)
extern void *alloca ();
# else
# if !defined (alloca)
extern char *alloca ();
# endif /* !alloca */
# endif /* !__hpux || !__STDC__ && !alloca */
# endif /* !HAVE_ALLOCA_H || C_ALLOCA */
#endif /* !__GNUC__ || C_ALLOCA */
#endif /* _MEMALLOC_H_ */
lib/posixheaders.old/posixdir.h
+49
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
/* posixdir.h -- Posix directory reading includes and defines. */
/* Copyright (C) 1987,1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 1, or (at your option)
any later version.
Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with Bash; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */
/* This file should be included instead of <dirent.h> or <sys/dir.h>. */
#if !defined (_POSIXDIR_H_)
#define _POSIXDIR_H_
#if defined (HAVE_DIRENT_H)
# include <dirent.h>
# define D_NAMLEN(d) (strlen ((d)->d_name))
#else
# if defined (HAVE_SYS_NDIR_H)
# include <sys/ndir.h>
# endif
# if defined (HAVE_SYS_DIR_H)
# include <sys/dir.h>
# endif
# if defined (HAVE_NDIR_H)
# include <ndir.h>
# endif
# if !defined (dirent)
# define dirent direct
# endif /* !dirent */
# define D_NAMLEN(d) ((d)->d_namlen)
#endif /* !HAVE_DIRENT_H */
#if defined (STRUCT_DIRENT_HAS_D_INO) && !defined (STRUCT_DIRENT_HAS_D_FILENO)
# define d_fileno d_ino
#endif
#endif /* !_POSIXDIR_H_ */
lib/posixheaders.old/posixjmp.h
+22
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
/* posixjmp.h -- wrapper for setjmp.h with changes for POSIX systems. */
#ifndef _POSIXJMP_H_
#define _POSIXJMP_H_
#include <setjmp.h>
/* This *must* be included *after* config.h */
#if defined (HAVE_POSIX_SIGSETJMP)
# define procenv_t sigjmp_buf
# if !defined (__OPENNT)
# undef setjmp
# define setjmp(x) sigsetjmp((x), 1)
# undef longjmp
# define longjmp(x, n) siglongjmp((x), (n))
# endif /* !__OPENNT */
#else
# define procenv_t jmp_buf
#endif
#endif /* _POSIXJMP_H_ */
lib/posixheaders.old/posixstat.h
+142
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
/* posixstat.h -- Posix stat(2) definitions for systems that
don't have them. */
/* Copyright (C) 1987,1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 1, or (at your option)
any later version.
Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with Bash; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */
/* This file should be included instead of <sys/stat.h>.
It relies on the local sys/stat.h to work though. */
#if !defined (_POSIXSTAT_H_)
#define _POSIXSTAT_H_
#include <sys/stat.h>
#if defined (STAT_MACROS_BROKEN)
# undef S_ISBLK
# undef S_ISCHR
# undef S_ISDIR
# undef S_ISFIFO
# undef S_ISREG
# undef S_ISLNK
#endif /* STAT_MACROS_BROKEN */
/* These are guaranteed to work only on isc386 */
#if !defined (S_IFDIR) && !defined (S_ISDIR)
# define S_IFDIR 0040000
#endif /* !S_IFDIR && !S_ISDIR */
#if !defined (S_IFMT)
# define S_IFMT 0170000
#endif /* !S_IFMT */
/* Posix 1003.1 5.6.1.1 <sys/stat.h> file types */
/* Some Posix-wannabe systems define _S_IF* macros instead of S_IF*, but
do not provide the S_IS* macros that Posix requires. */
#if defined (_S_IFMT) && !defined (S_IFMT)
#define S_IFMT _S_IFMT
#endif
#if defined (_S_IFIFO) && !defined (S_IFIFO)
#define S_IFIFO _S_IFIFO
#endif
#if defined (_S_IFCHR) && !defined (S_IFCHR)
#define S_IFCHR _S_IFCHR
#endif
#if defined (_S_IFDIR) && !defined (S_IFDIR)
#define S_IFDIR _S_IFDIR
#endif
#if defined (_S_IFBLK) && !defined (S_IFBLK)
#define S_IFBLK _S_IFBLK
#endif
#if defined (_S_IFREG) && !defined (S_IFREG)
#define S_IFREG _S_IFREG
#endif
#if defined (_S_IFLNK) && !defined (S_IFLNK)
#define S_IFLNK _S_IFLNK
#endif
#if defined (_S_IFSOCK) && !defined (S_IFSOCK)
#define S_IFSOCK _S_IFSOCK
#endif
/* Test for each symbol individually and define the ones necessary (some
systems claiming Posix compatibility define some but not all). */
#if defined (S_IFBLK) && !defined (S_ISBLK)
#define S_ISBLK(m) (((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFBLK) /* block device */
#endif
#if defined (S_IFCHR) && !defined (S_ISCHR)
#define S_ISCHR(m) (((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFCHR) /* character device */
#endif
#if defined (S_IFDIR) && !defined (S_ISDIR)
#define S_ISDIR(m) (((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFDIR) /* directory */
#endif
#if defined (S_IFREG) && !defined (S_ISREG)
#define S_ISREG(m) (((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFREG) /* file */
#endif
#if defined (S_IFIFO) && !defined (S_ISFIFO)
#define S_ISFIFO(m) (((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFIFO) /* fifo - named pipe */
#endif
#if defined (S_IFLNK) && !defined (S_ISLNK)
#define S_ISLNK(m) (((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFLNK) /* symbolic link */
#endif
#if defined (S_IFSOCK) && !defined (S_ISSOCK)
#define S_ISSOCK(m) (((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFSOCK) /* socket */
#endif
/*
* POSIX 1003.1 5.6.1.2 <sys/stat.h> File Modes
*/
#if !defined (S_IRWXU)
# if !defined (S_IREAD)
# define S_IREAD 00400
# define S_IWRITE 00200
# define S_IEXEC 00100
# endif /* S_IREAD */
# if !defined (S_IRUSR)
# define S_IRUSR S_IREAD /* read, owner */
# define S_IWUSR S_IWRITE /* write, owner */
# define S_IXUSR S_IEXEC /* execute, owner */
# define S_IRGRP (S_IREAD >> 3) /* read, group */
# define S_IWGRP (S_IWRITE >> 3) /* write, group */
# define S_IXGRP (S_IEXEC >> 3) /* execute, group */
# define S_IROTH (S_IREAD >> 6) /* read, other */
# define S_IWOTH (S_IWRITE >> 6) /* write, other */
# define S_IXOTH (S_IEXEC >> 6) /* execute, other */
# endif /* !S_IRUSR */
# define S_IRWXU (S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR | S_IXUSR)
# define S_IRWXG (S_IRGRP | S_IWGRP | S_IXGRP)
# define S_IRWXO (S_IROTH | S_IWOTH | S_IXOTH)
#endif /* !S_IRWXU */
/* These are non-standard, but are used in builtins.c$symbolic_umask() */
#define S_IRUGO (S_IRUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IROTH)
#define S_IWUGO (S_IWUSR | S_IWGRP | S_IWOTH)
#define S_IXUGO (S_IXUSR | S_IXGRP | S_IXOTH)
#endif /* _POSIXSTAT_H_ */
lib/posixheaders.old/stdc.h
+79
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
/* stdc.h -- macros to make source compile on both ANSI C and K&R C
compilers. */
/* Copyright (C) 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 1, or (at your option)
any later version.
Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with Bash; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */
#if !defined (_STDC_H_)
#define _STDC_H_
/* Adapted from BSD /usr/include/sys/cdefs.h. */
/* A function can be defined using prototypes and compile on both ANSI C
and traditional C compilers with something like this:
extern char *func __P((char *, char *, int)); */
#if defined (__STDC__)
# if !defined (__P)
# define __P(protos) protos
# endif
# define __STRING(x) #x
# if !defined (__GNUC__)
# define inline
# endif
#else /* !__STDC__ */
# if !defined (__P)
# define __P(protos) ()
# endif
# define __STRING(x) "x"
#if defined (__GNUC__) /* gcc with -traditional */
# if !defined (const)
# define const __const
# endif
# if !defined (inline)
# define inline __inline
# endif
# if !defined (signed)
# define signed __signed
# endif
# if !defined (volatile)
# define volatile __volatile
# endif
#else /* !__GNUC__ */
# if !defined (const)
# define const
# endif
# if !defined (inline)
# define inline
# endif
# if !defined (signed)
# define signed
# endif
# if !defined (volatile)
# define volatile
# endif
#endif /* !__GNUC__ */
#endif /* !__STDC__ */
#endif /* !_STDC_H_ */
lib/readline/-i
View File
lib/readline/Makefile.in
+8
View File
@@ -20,6 +20,14 @@
# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA.
PACKAGE = @PACKAGE_NAME@
VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@
PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@
PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@
PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@
PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@
srcdir = @srcdir@
VPATH = .:@srcdir@
topdir = @top_srcdir@
lib/readline/NEW/xxx-autocomplete
+39
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
#if defined (READLINE_AUTOCOMPLETE)
/* Return the list of completions for the text between START and END.
FOUND_QUOTE is non-zero if we're completing a quoted word; if so,
QUOTE_CHAR is the delimiter. If NONTRIVIAL_P is nonzero, it gets
set to a flag saying whether or not the completion added anything
to the word. Not part of rl_complete_internal because it's too
hard to separate functions without postprocess_matches possibly being
called twice; here to support the autocompletion code. */
char **
_rl_generate_completions (start, end, found_quote, quote_char, nontrivial_p)
int start, end, found_quote, quote_char, *nontrivial_p;
{
rl_compentry_func_t *our_func;
char *text;
char **matches;
our_func = rl_completion_entry_function
? rl_completion_entry_function
: rl_filename_completion_function;
text = rl_copy_text (start, end);
matches = gen_completion_matches (text, start, end, our_func, found_quote, quote_char);
/* *nontrivial_p is set if the common prefix adds something to the word
being completed. */
if (nontrivial_p)
*nontrivial_p = matches && strcmp (text, matches[0]) != 0;
free (text);
/* Postprocess the matches */
if (matches == 0)
return (char **)0;
if (postprocess_matches (&matches, rl_filename_completion_desired) == 0)
return (char **)0;
return 0;
}
#endif
lib/readline/ansi_stdlib.h
-54
View File
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
/* ansi_stdlib.h -- An ANSI Standard stdlib.h. */
/* A minimal stdlib.h containing extern declarations for those functions
that bash uses. */
/* Copyright (C) 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
version.
Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with Bash; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
#if !defined (_STDLIB_H_)
#define _STDLIB_H_ 1
/* String conversion functions. */
extern int atoi ();
extern double atof ();
extern double strtod ();
/* Memory allocation functions. */
/* Generic pointer type. */
#ifndef PTR_T
#if defined (__STDC__)
# define PTR_T void *
#else
# define PTR_T char *
#endif
#endif /* PTR_T */
extern PTR_T malloc ();
extern PTR_T realloc ();
extern void free ();
/* Other miscellaneous functions. */
extern void abort ();
extern void exit ();
extern char *getenv ();
extern void qsort ();
#endif /* _STDLIB_H */
lib/readline/ansi_stdlib.h
Symlink
+1
View File
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
../../include/ansi_stdlib.h
lib/readline/complete.c
+19 -3
View File
@@ -288,6 +288,19 @@ int rl_completion_suppress_append = 0;
default is a space. */
int rl_completion_append_character = ' ';
/* If non-zero, the completion functions don't append any closing quote.
This is set to 0 by rl_complete_internal and may be changed by an
application-specific completion function. */
int rl_completion_suppress_quote = 0;
/* Set to any quote character readline thinks it finds before any application
completion function is called. */
int rl_completion_quote_character;
/* Set to a non-zero value if readline found quoting anywhere in the word to
be completed; set before any application completion function is called. */
int rl_completion_found_quote;
/* If non-zero, a slash will be appended to completed filenames that are
symbolic links to directory names, subject to the value of the
mark-directories variable (which is user-settable). This exists so
@@ -382,7 +395,7 @@ set_completion_defaults (what_to_do)
rl_filename_completion_desired = 0;
rl_filename_quoting_desired = 1;
rl_completion_type = what_to_do;
rl_completion_suppress_append = 0;
rl_completion_suppress_append = rl_completion_suppress_quote = 0;
/* The completion entry function may optionally change this. */
rl_completion_mark_symlink_dirs = _rl_complete_mark_symlink_dirs;
@@ -891,6 +904,9 @@ gen_completion_matches (text, start, end, our_func, found_quote, quote_char)
{
char **matches, *temp;
rl_completion_found_quote = found_quote;
rl_completion_quote_character = quote_char;
/* If the user wants to TRY to complete, but then wants to give
up and use the default completion function, they set the
variable rl_attempted_completion_function. */
@@ -1443,7 +1459,8 @@ append_to_match (text, delimiter, quote_char, nontrivial_match)
struct stat finfo;
temp_string_index = 0;
if (quote_char && rl_point && rl_line_buffer[rl_point - 1] != quote_char)
if (quote_char && rl_point && rl_completion_suppress_quote == 0 &&
rl_line_buffer[rl_point - 1] != quote_char)
temp_string[temp_string_index++] = quote_char;
if (delimiter)
@@ -1575,7 +1592,6 @@ rl_complete_internal (what_to_do)
our_func = rl_completion_entry_function
? rl_completion_entry_function
: rl_filename_completion_function;
/* We now look backwards for the start of a filename/variable word. */
end = rl_point;
found_quote = delimiter = 0;
lib/readline/display.c
+34 -19
View File
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ rl_redisplay ()
#endif
_rl_output_some_chars (local_prompt, nleft);
if (MB_CUR_MAX > 1 && rl_byte_oriented == 0)
_rl_last_c_pos = _rl_col_width(local_prompt, 0, nleft);
_rl_last_c_pos = _rl_col_width (local_prompt, 0, nleft);
else
_rl_last_c_pos = nleft;
}
@@ -1126,25 +1126,36 @@ update_line (old, new, current_line, omax, nmax, inv_botlin)
#if defined (HANDLE_MULTIBYTE)
if (MB_CUR_MAX > 1 && rl_byte_oriented == 0)
{
memset (&ps_new, 0, sizeof(mbstate_t));
memset (&ps_old, 0, sizeof(mbstate_t));
if (omax == nmax && STREQN (new, old, omax))
/* See if the old line is a subset of the new line, so that the
only change is adding characters. */
temp = (omax < nmax) ? omax : nmax;
if (memcmp (old, new, temp) == 0)
{
ofd = old + omax;
nfd = new + nmax;
ofd = old + temp;
nfd = new + temp;
}
else
{
new_offset = old_offset = 0;
for (ofd = old, nfd = new;
(ofd - old < omax) && *ofd &&
_rl_compare_chars(old, old_offset, &ps_old, new, new_offset, &ps_new); )
{
memset (&ps_new, 0, sizeof(mbstate_t));
memset (&ps_old, 0, sizeof(mbstate_t));
if (omax == nmax && STREQN (new, old, omax))
{
old_offset = _rl_find_next_mbchar (old, old_offset, 1, MB_FIND_ANY);
new_offset = _rl_find_next_mbchar (new, new_offset, 1, MB_FIND_ANY);
ofd = old + old_offset;
nfd = new + new_offset;
ofd = old + omax;
nfd = new + nmax;
}
else
{
new_offset = old_offset = 0;
for (ofd = old, nfd = new;
(ofd - old < omax) && *ofd &&
_rl_compare_chars(old, old_offset, &ps_old, new, new_offset, &ps_new); )
{
old_offset = _rl_find_next_mbchar (old, old_offset, 1, MB_FIND_ANY);
new_offset = _rl_find_next_mbchar (new, new_offset, 1, MB_FIND_ANY);
ofd = old + old_offset;
nfd = new + new_offset;
}
}
}
}
@@ -1358,7 +1369,11 @@ update_line (old, new, current_line, omax, nmax, inv_botlin)
if ((temp - lendiff) > 0)
{
_rl_output_some_chars (nfd + lendiff, temp - lendiff);
#if 0
#if 1
/* XXX -- this bears closer inspection. Fixes a redisplay bug
reported against bash-3.0-alpha by Andreas Schwab involving
multibyte characters and prompt strings with invisible
characters, but was previously disabled. */
_rl_last_c_pos += _rl_col_width (nfd+lendiff, 0, temp-col_lendiff);
#else
_rl_last_c_pos += _rl_col_width (nfd+lendiff, 0, temp-lendiff);
@@ -2166,7 +2181,7 @@ _rl_col_width (str, start, end)
memset (&ps, 0, sizeof (mbstate_t));
}
else if (MB_NULLWCH (tmp))
break; /* Found '\0' */
break; /* Found '\0' */
else
{
point += tmp;
@@ -2198,7 +2213,7 @@ _rl_col_width (str, start, end)
memset (&ps, 0, sizeof (mbstate_t));
}
else if (MB_NULLWCH (tmp))
break; /* Found '\0' */
break; /* Found '\0' */
else
{
point += tmp;
lib/readline/doc/Makefile.in
+144
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
# Derived by hand from the generated readline-src/doc/Makefile
# This makefile for Readline library documentation is in -*- text -*- mode.
# Emacs likes it that way.
# Copyright (C) 1996-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
#
# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
# any later version.
#
# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
# GNU General Public License for more details.
#
# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA.
topdir = .
srcdir = .
VPATH = .
prefix = /usr/local
infodir = ${prefix}/info
mandir = ${prefix}/man
manpfx = man
man1ext = 1
man1dir = $(mandir)/$(manpfx)$(man1ext)
man3ext = 3
man3dir = $(mandir)/$(manpfx)$(man3ext)
SHELL = /bin/sh
RM = rm -f
INSTALL = /usr/bin/install -c
INSTALL_DATA = ${INSTALL} -m 644
BUILD_DIR = .
TEXINPUTDIR = $(srcdir)
MAKEINFO = LANGUAGE= makeinfo
TEXI2DVI = $(srcdir)/texi2dvi
TEXI2HTML = $(srcdir)/texi2html
QUIETPS = #set this to -q to shut up dvips
PSDPI = 600
DVIPS = dvips -D ${PSDPI} $(QUIETPS) -o $@ # tricky
RLSRC = $(srcdir)/rlman.texi $(srcdir)/rluser.texi \
$(srcdir)/rltech.texi $(srcdir)/version.texi \
$(srcdir)/rluserman.texi
HISTSRC = $(srcdir)/history.texi $(srcdir)/hsuser.texi \
$(srcdir)/hstech.texi $(srcdir)/version.texi
# This should be a program that converts troff to an ascii-readable format
NROFF = groff -Tascii
# This should be a program that converts troff to postscript
GROFF = groff
DVIOBJ = readline.dvi history.dvi rluserman.dvi
INFOOBJ = readline.info history.info rluserman.info
PSOBJ = readline.ps history.ps rluserman.ps
HTMLOBJ = readline.html history.html rluserman.html
INTERMEDIATE_OBJ = rlman.dvi
CREATED_DOCS = $(DVIOBJ) $(INFOOBJ) $(PSOBJ) $(HTMLOBJ)
.SUFFIXES: .ps .txt .dvi
all: info dvi html ps
nodvi: info html
readline.dvi: $(RLSRC)
TEXINPUTS=.:$(TEXINPUTDIR):$$TEXINPUTS $(TEXI2DVI) $(srcdir)/rlman.texi
mv rlman.dvi readline.dvi
readline.info: $(RLSRC)
$(MAKEINFO) --no-split -I $(TEXINPUTDIR) -o $@ $(srcdir)/rlman.texi
rluserman.dvi: $(RLSRC)
TEXINPUTS=.:$(TEXINPUTDIR):$$TEXINPUTS $(TEXI2DVI) $(srcdir)/rluserman.texi
rluserman.info: $(RLSRC)
$(MAKEINFO) --no-split -I $(TEXINPUTDIR) -o $@ $(srcdir)/rluserman.texi
history.dvi: ${HISTSRC}
TEXINPUTS=.:$(TEXINPUTDIR):$$TEXINPUTS $(TEXI2DVI) $(srcdir)/history.texi
history.info: ${HISTSRC}
$(MAKEINFO) --no-split -I $(TEXINPUTDIR) -o $@ $(srcdir)/history.texi
readline.ps: readline.dvi
$(RM) $@
$(DVIPS) readline.dvi
rluserman.ps: rluserman.dvi
$(RM) $@
$(DVIPS) rluserman.dvi
history.ps: history.dvi
$(RM) $@
$(DVIPS) history.dvi
readline.html: ${RLSRC}
$(TEXI2HTML) -menu -monolithic -I $(TEXINPUTDIR) $(srcdir)/rlman.texi
sed -e 's:rlman.html:readline.html:' rlman.html > readline.html
$(RM) rlman.html
rluserman.html: ${RLSRC}
$(TEXI2HTML) -menu -monolithic -I $(TEXINPUTDIR) $(srcdir)/rluserman.texi
history.html: ${HISTSRC}
$(TEXI2HTML) -menu -monolithic -I $(TEXINPUTDIR) $(srcdir)/history.texi
info: $(INFOOBJ)
dvi: $(DVIOBJ)
ps: $(PSOBJ)
html: $(HTMLOBJ)
clean:
$(RM) *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg *.toc *.tp *.vr *.cps *.pgs \
*.fns *.kys *.tps *.vrs *.bt *.bts *.o core *.core
distclean: clean
$(RM) $(CREATED_DOCS)
$(RM) $(INTERMEDIATE_OBJ)
$(RM) Makefile
mostlyclean: clean
maintainer-clean: clean
$(RM) $(CREATED_DOCS)
$(RM) $(INTERMEDIATE_OBJ)
$(RM) Makefile
install:
@echo "This documentation should not be installed."
uninstall:
lib/readline/doc/Makefile.old
+76
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
# This makefile for Readline library documentation is in -*- text -*- mode.
# Emacs likes it that way.
RM = rm -f
MAKEINFO = makeinfo
TEXI2DVI = texi2dvi
TEXI2HTML = texi2html
QUIETPS = #set this to -q to shut up dvips
DVIPS = dvips -D 300 $(QUIETPS) -o $@ # tricky
INSTALL_DATA = cp
infodir = /usr/local/info
RLSRC = rlman.texinfo rluser.texinfo rltech.texinfo
HISTSRC = hist.texinfo hsuser.texinfo hstech.texinfo
DVIOBJ = readline.dvi history.dvi
INFOOBJ = readline.info history.info
PSOBJ = readline.ps history.ps
HTMLOBJ = readline.html history.html
all: info dvi html ps
nodvi: info html
readline.dvi: $(RLSRC)
$(TEXI2DVI) rlman.texinfo
mv rlman.dvi readline.dvi
readline.info: $(RLSRC)
$(MAKEINFO) --no-split -o $@ rlman.texinfo
history.dvi: ${HISTSRC}
$(TEXI2DVI) hist.texinfo
mv hist.dvi history.dvi
history.info: ${HISTSRC}
$(MAKEINFO) --no-split -o $@ hist.texinfo
readline.ps: readline.dvi
$(RM) $@
$(DVIPS) readline.dvi
history.ps: history.dvi
$(RM) $@
$(DVIPS) history.dvi
readline.html: ${RLSRC}
$(TEXI2HTML) rlman.texinfo
sed -e 's:rlman.html:readline.html:' -e 's:rlman_toc.html:readline_toc.html:' rlman.html > readline.html
sed -e 's:rlman.html:readline.html:' -e 's:rlman_toc.html:readline_toc.html:' rlman_toc.html > readline_toc.html
$(RM) rlman.html rlman_toc.html
history.html: ${HISTSRC}
$(TEXI2HTML) hist.texinfo
sed -e 's:hist.html:history.html:' -e 's:hist_toc.html:history_toc.html:' hist.html > history.html
sed -e 's:hist.html:history.html:' -e 's:hist_toc.html:history_toc.html:' hist_toc.html > history_toc.html
$(RM) hist.html hist_toc.html
info: $(INFOOBJ)
dvi: $(DVIOBJ)
ps: $(PSOBJ)
html: $(HTMLOBJ)
clean:
$(RM) *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg *.toc *.tp *.vr *.cps *.pgs \
*.fns *.kys *.tps *.vrs *.o core
distclean: clean
mostlyclean: clean
maintainer-clean: clean
$(RM) *.dvi *.info *.info-* *.ps *.html
install: info
${INSTALL_DATA} readline.info $(infodir)/readline.info
${INSTALL_DATA} history.info $(infodir)/history.info
lib/readline/doc/fdl.texi
-452
View File
@@ -1,452 +0,0 @@
@node GNU Free Documentation License
@appendixsec GNU Free Documentation License
@cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
@center Version 1.2, November 2002
@display
Copyright @copyright{} 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
@end display
@enumerate 0
@item
PREAMBLE
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
functional and useful document @dfn{free} in the sense of freedom: to
assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way
to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible
for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of ``copyleft'', which means that derivative
works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It
complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
license designed for free software.
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals;
it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License
principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
@item
APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a
world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
work under the conditions stated herein. The ``Document'', below,
refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a
licensee, and is addressed as ``you''. You accept the license if you
copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission
under copyright law.
A ``Modified Version'' of the Document means any work containing the
Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
modifications and/or translated into another language.
A ``Secondary Section'' is a named appendix or a front-matter section
of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall
directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in
part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain
any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical
connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
them.
The ``Invariant Sections'' are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
that says that the Document is released under this License. If a
section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not
allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero
Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant
Sections then there are none.
The ``Cover Texts'' are certain short passages of text that are listed,
as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may
be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
A ``Transparent'' copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
represented in a format whose specification is available to the
general public, that is suitable for revising the document
straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart
or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.
An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount
of text. A copy that is not ``Transparent'' is called ``Opaque''.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
@sc{ascii} without markup, Texinfo input format, La@TeX{} input
format, @acronym{SGML} or @acronym{XML} using a publicly available
@acronym{DTD}, and standard-conforming simple @acronym{HTML},
PostScript or @acronym{PDF} designed for human modification. Examples
of transparent image formats include @acronym{PNG}, @acronym{XCF} and
@acronym{JPG}. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be
read and edited only by proprietary word processors, @acronym{SGML} or
@acronym{XML} for which the @acronym{DTD} and/or processing tools are
not generally available, and the machine-generated @acronym{HTML},
PostScript or @acronym{PDF} produced by some word processors for
output purposes only.
The ``Title Page'' means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in
formats which do not have any title page as such, ``Title Page'' means
the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
A section ``Entitled XYZ'' means a named subunit of the Document whose
title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following
text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a
specific section name mentioned below, such as ``Acknowledgements'',
``Dedications'', ``Endorsements'', or ``History''.) To ``Preserve the Title''
of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a
section ``Entitled XYZ'' according to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which
states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty
Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this
License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
no effect on the meaning of this License.
@item
VERBATIM COPYING
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use
technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept
compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough
number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
you may publicly display copies.
@item
COPYING IN QUANTITY
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present
the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition.
Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
as verbatim copying in other respects.
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
pages.
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
a computer-network location from which the general network-using
public has access to download using public-standard network protocols
a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material.
If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps,
when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure
that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an
Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that
edition to the public.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give
them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
@item
MODIFICATIONS
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
@enumerate A
@item
Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
(which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version
if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
@item
List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five),
unless they release you from this requirement.
@item
State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
Modified Version, as the publisher.
@item
Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
@item
Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
adjacent to the other copyright notices.
@item
Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
@item
Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
@item
Include an unaltered copy of this License.
@item
Preserve the section Entitled ``History'', Preserve its Title, and add
to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If
there is no section Entitled ``History'' in the Document, create one
stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
Version as stated in the previous sentence.
@item
Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
it was based on. These may be placed in the ``History'' section.
You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
@item
For any section Entitled ``Acknowledgements'' or ``Dedications'', Preserve
the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all the
substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or
dedications given therein.
@item
Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
@item
Delete any section Entitled ``Endorsements''. Such a section
may not be included in the Modified Version.
@item
Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled ``Endorsements'' or
to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
@item
Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
@end enumerate
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the
list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
You may add a section Entitled ``Endorsements'', provided it contains
nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
parties---for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of
Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already
includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
@item
COMBINING DOCUMENTS
You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified
versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled ``History''
in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled
``History''; likewise combine any sections Entitled ``Acknowledgements'',
and any sections Entitled ``Dedications''. You must delete all
sections Entitled ``Endorsements.''
@item
COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents
released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this
License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in
the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for
verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute
it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this
License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all
other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
@item
AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium, is called an ``aggregate'' if the copyright
resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights
of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
When the Document is included an aggregate, this License does not
apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves
derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of
the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form.
Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole
aggregate.
@item
TRANSLATION
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4.
Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include
the original English version of this License and the original versions
of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between
the translation and the original version of this License or a notice
or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
If a section in the Document is Entitled ``Acknowledgements'',
``Dedications'', or ``History'', the requirement (section 4) to Preserve
its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual
title.
@item
TERMINATION
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except
as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to
copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
parties remain in full compliance.
@item
FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions
of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
@uref{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/}.
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
License ``or any later version'' applies to it, you have the option of
following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version
number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.
@end enumerate
@page
@appendixsubsec ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
the License in the document and put the following copyright and
license notices just after the title page:
@smallexample
@group
Copyright (C) @var{year} @var{your name}.
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
Free Documentation License''.
@end group
@end smallexample
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts,
replace the ``with...Texts.'' line with this:
@smallexample
@group
with the Invariant Sections being @var{list their titles}, with
the Front-Cover Texts being @var{list}, and with the Back-Cover Texts
being @var{list}.
@end group
@end smallexample
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
situation.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
to permit their use in free software.
@c Local Variables:
@c ispell-local-pdict: "ispell-dict"
@c End:
lib/readline/doc/fdl.texi
Symlink
+1
View File
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
../../../doc/fdl.texi
lib/readline/doc/history.3
+663
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,663 @@
.\"
.\" MAN PAGE COMMENTS to
.\"
.\" Chet Ramey
.\" Information Network Services
.\" Case Western Reserve University
.\" chet@ins.CWRU.Edu
.\"
.\" Last Change: Thu Jul 31 08:46:08 EDT 2003
.\"
.TH HISTORY 3 "2003 July 31" "GNU History 5.0"
.\"
.\" File Name macro. This used to be `.PN', for Path Name,
.\" but Sun doesn't seem to like that very much.
.\"
.de FN
\fI\|\\$1\|\fP
..
.ds lp \fR\|(\fP
.ds rp \fR\|)\fP
.\" FnN return-value fun-name N arguments
.de Fn1
\fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3\fP\\*(rp
.br
..
.de Fn2
.if t \fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3,\|\\$4\fP\\*(rp
.if n \fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3, \\$4\fP\\*(rp
.br
..
.de Fn3
.if t \fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3,\|\\$4,\|\\$5\fP\|\\*(rp
.if n \fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3, \\$4, \\$5\fP\\*(rp
.br
..
.de Vb
\fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP
.br
..
.SH NAME
history \- GNU History Library
.SH COPYRIGHT
.if t The GNU History Library is Copyright \(co 1989-2002 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc.
.if n The GNU History Library is Copyright (C) 1989-2002 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc.
.SH DESCRIPTION
Many programs read input from the user a line at a time. The GNU
History library is able to keep track of those lines, associate arbitrary
data with each line, and utilize information from previous lines in
composing new ones.
.PP
.SH "HISTORY EXPANSION"
.PP
The history library supports a history expansion feature that
is identical to the history expansion in
.BR bash.
This section describes what syntax features are available.
.PP
History expansions introduce words from the history list into
the input stream, making it easy to repeat commands, insert the
arguments to a previous command into the current input line, or
fix errors in previous commands quickly.
.PP
History expansion is usually performed immediately after a complete line
is read.
It takes place in two parts.
The first is to determine which line from the history list
to use during substitution.
The second is to select portions of that line for inclusion into
the current one.
The line selected from the history is the \fIevent\fP,
and the portions of that line that are acted upon are \fIwords\fP.
Various \fImodifiers\fP are available to manipulate the selected words.
The line is broken into words in the same fashion as \fBbash\fP
does when reading input,
so that several words that would otherwise be separated
are considered one word when surrounded by quotes (see the
description of \fBhistory_tokenize()\fP below).
History expansions are introduced by the appearance of the
history expansion character, which is \^\fB!\fP\^ by default.
Only backslash (\^\fB\e\fP\^) and single quotes can quote
the history expansion character.
.SS Event Designators
.PP
An event designator is a reference to a command line entry in the
history list.
.PP
.PD 0
.TP
.B !
Start a history substitution, except when followed by a
.BR blank ,
newline, = or (.
.TP
.B !\fIn\fR
Refer to command line
.IR n .
.TP
.B !\-\fIn\fR
Refer to the current command line minus
.IR n .
.TP
.B !!
Refer to the previous command. This is a synonym for `!\-1'.
.TP
.B !\fIstring\fR
Refer to the most recent command starting with
.IR string .
.TP
.B !?\fIstring\fR\fB[?]\fR
Refer to the most recent command containing
.IR string .
The trailing \fB?\fP may be omitted if
.I string
is followed immediately by a newline.
.TP
.B \d\s+2^\s-2\u\fIstring1\fP\d\s+2^\s-2\u\fIstring2\fP\d\s+2^\s-2\u
Quick substitution. Repeat the last command, replacing
.I string1
with
.IR string2 .
Equivalent to
``!!:s/\fIstring1\fP/\fIstring2\fP/''
(see \fBModifiers\fP below).
.TP
.B !#
The entire command line typed so far.
.PD
.SS Word Designators
.PP
Word designators are used to select desired words from the event.
A
.B :
separates the event specification from the word designator.
It may be omitted if the word designator begins with a
.BR ^ ,
.BR $ ,
.BR * ,
.BR \- ,
or
.BR % .
Words are numbered from the beginning of the line,
with the first word being denoted by 0 (zero).
Words are inserted into the current line separated by single spaces.
.PP
.PD 0
.TP
.B 0 (zero)
The zeroth word. For the shell, this is the command
word.
.TP
.I n
The \fIn\fRth word.
.TP
.B ^
The first argument. That is, word 1.
.TP
.B $
The last argument.
.TP
.B %
The word matched by the most recent `?\fIstring\fR?' search.
.TP
.I x\fB\-\fPy
A range of words; `\-\fIy\fR' abbreviates `0\-\fIy\fR'.
.TP
.B *
All of the words but the zeroth. This is a synonym
for `\fI1\-$\fP'. It is not an error to use
.B *
if there is just one
word in the event; the empty string is returned in that case.
.TP
.B x*
Abbreviates \fIx\-$\fP.
.TP
.B x\-
Abbreviates \fIx\-$\fP like \fBx*\fP, but omits the last word.
.PD
.PP
If a word designator is supplied without an event specification, the
previous command is used as the event.
.SS Modifiers
.PP
After the optional word designator, there may appear a sequence of
one or more of the following modifiers, each preceded by a `:'.
.PP
.PD 0
.PP
.TP
.B h
Remove a trailing file name component, leaving only the head.
.TP
.B t
Remove all leading file name components, leaving the tail.
.TP
.B r
Remove a trailing suffix of the form \fI.xxx\fP, leaving the
basename.
.TP
.B e
Remove all but the trailing suffix.
.TP
.B p
Print the new command but do not execute it.
.TP
.B q
Quote the substituted words, escaping further substitutions.
.TP
.B x
Quote the substituted words as with
.BR q ,
but break into words at
.B blanks
and newlines.
.TP
.B s/\fIold\fP/\fInew\fP/
Substitute
.I new
for the first occurrence of
.I old
in the event line. Any delimiter can be used in place of /. The
final delimiter is optional if it is the last character of the
event line. The delimiter may be quoted in
.I old
and
.I new
with a single backslash. If & appears in
.IR new ,
it is replaced by
.IR old .
A single backslash will quote the &. If
.I old
is null, it is set to the last
.I old
substituted, or, if no previous history substitutions took place,
the last
.I string
in a
.B !?\fIstring\fR\fB[?]\fR
search.
.TP
.B &
Repeat the previous substitution.
.TP
.B g
Cause changes to be applied over the entire event line. This is
used in conjunction with `\fB:s\fP' (e.g., `\fB:gs/\fIold\fP/\fInew\fP/\fR')
or `\fB:&\fP'. If used with
`\fB:s\fP', any delimiter can be used
in place of /, and the final delimiter is optional
if it is the last character of the event line.
An \fBa\fP may be used as a synonym for \fBg\fP.
.TP
.B G
Apply the following `\fBs\fP' modifier once to each word in the event line.
.PD
.SH "PROGRAMMING WITH HISTORY FUNCTIONS"
This section describes how to use the History library in other programs.
.SS Introduction to History
.PP
The programmer using the History library has available functions
for remembering lines on a history list, associating arbitrary data
with a line, removing lines from the list, searching through the list
for a line containing an arbitrary text string, and referencing any line
in the list directly. In addition, a history \fIexpansion\fP function
is available which provides for a consistent user interface across
different programs.
.PP
The user using programs written with the History library has the
benefit of a consistent user interface with a set of well-known
commands for manipulating the text of previous lines and using that text
in new commands. The basic history manipulation commands are
identical to
the history substitution provided by \fBbash\fP.
.PP
If the programmer desires, he can use the Readline library, which
includes some history manipulation by default, and has the added
advantage of command line editing.
.PP
Before declaring any functions using any functionality the History
library provides in other code, an application writer should include
the file
.FN <readline/history.h>
in any file that uses the
History library's features. It supplies extern declarations for all
of the library's public functions and variables, and declares all of
the public data structures.
.SS History Storage
.PP
The history list is an array of history entries. A history entry is
declared as follows:
.PP
.Vb "typedef void *" histdata_t;
.PP
.nf
typedef struct _hist_entry {
char *line;
char *timestamp;
histdata_t data;
} HIST_ENTRY;
.fi
.PP
The history list itself might therefore be declared as
.PP
.Vb "HIST_ENTRY **" the_history_list;
.PP
The state of the History library is encapsulated into a single structure:
.PP
.nf
/*
* A structure used to pass around the current state of the history.
*/
typedef struct _hist_state {
HIST_ENTRY **entries; /* Pointer to the entries themselves. */
int offset; /* The location pointer within this array. */
int length; /* Number of elements within this array. */
int size; /* Number of slots allocated to this array. */
int flags;
} HISTORY_STATE;
.fi
.PP
If the flags member includes \fBHS_STIFLED\fP, the history has been
stifled.
.SH "History Functions"
.PP
This section describes the calling sequence for the various functions
exported by the GNU History library.
.SS Initializing History and State Management
This section describes functions used to initialize and manage
the state of the History library when you want to use the history
functions in your program.
.Fn1 void using_history void
Begin a session in which the history functions might be used. This
initializes the interactive variables.
.Fn1 "HISTORY_STATE *" history_get_history_state void
Return a structure describing the current state of the input history.
.Fn1 void history_set_history_state "HISTORY_STATE *state"
Set the state of the history list according to \fIstate\fP.
.SS History List Management
These functions manage individual entries on the history list, or set
parameters managing the list itself.
.Fn1 void add_history "const char *string"
Place \fIstring\fP at the end of the history list. The associated data
field (if any) is set to \fBNULL\fP.
.Fn1 void add_history_time "const char *string"
Change the time stamp associated with the most recent history entry to
\fIstring\fP.
.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" remove_history "int which"
Remove history entry at offset \fIwhich\fP from the history. The
removed element is returned so you can free the line, data,
and containing structure.
.Fn1 "histdata_t" free_history_entry "HIST_ENTRY *histent"
Free the history entry \fIhistent\fP and any history library private
data associated with it. Returns the application-specific data
so the caller can dispose of it.
.Fn3 "HIST_ENTRY *" replace_history_entry "int which" "const char *line" "histdata_t data"
Make the history entry at offset \fIwhich\fP have \fIline\fP and \fIdata\fP.
This returns the old entry so the caller can dispose of any
application-specific data. In the case
of an invalid \fIwhich\fP, a \fBNULL\fP pointer is returned.
.Fn1 void clear_history "void"
Clear the history list by deleting all the entries.
.Fn1 void stifle_history "int max"
Stifle the history list, remembering only the last \fImax\fP entries.
.Fn1 int unstifle_history "void"
Stop stifling the history. This returns the previously-set
maximum number of history entries (as set by \fBstifle_history()\fP).
history was stifled. The value is positive if the history was
stifled, negative if it wasn't.
.Fn1 int history_is_stifled "void"
Returns non-zero if the history is stifled, zero if it is not.
.SS Information About the History List
These functions return information about the entire history list or
individual list entries.
.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY **" history_list "void"
Return a \fBNULL\fP terminated array of \fIHIST_ENTRY *\fP which is the
current input history. Element 0 of this list is the beginning of time.
If there is no history, return \fBNULL\fP.
.Fn1 int where_history "void"
Returns the offset of the current history element.
.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" current_history "void"
Return the history entry at the current position, as determined by
\fBwhere_history()\fP. If there is no entry there, return a \fBNULL\fP
pointer.
.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" history_get "int offset"
Return the history entry at position \fIoffset\fP, starting from
\fBhistory_base\fP.
If there is no entry there, or if \fIoffset\fP
is greater than the history length, return a \fBNULL\fP pointer.
.Fn1 "time_t" history_get_time "HIST_ENTRY *"
Return the time stamp associated with the history entry passed as the argument.
.Fn1 int history_total_bytes "void"
Return the number of bytes that the primary history entries are using.
This function returns the sum of the lengths of all the lines in the
history.
.SS Moving Around the History List
These functions allow the current index into the history list to be
set or changed.
.Fn1 int history_set_pos "int pos"
Set the current history offset to \fIpos\fP, an absolute index
into the list.
Returns 1 on success, 0 if \fIpos\fP is less than zero or greater
than the number of history entries.
.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" previous_history "void"
Back up the current history offset to the previous history entry, and
return a pointer to that entry. If there is no previous entry, return
a \fBNULL\fP pointer.
.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" next_history "void"
Move the current history offset forward to the next history entry, and
return the a pointer to that entry. If there is no next entry, return
a \fBNULL\fP pointer.
.SS Searching the History List
These functions allow searching of the history list for entries containing
a specific string. Searching may be performed both forward and backward
from the current history position. The search may be \fIanchored\fP,
meaning that the string must match at the beginning of the history entry.
.Fn2 int history_search "const char *string" "int direction"
Search the history for \fIstring\fP, starting at the current history offset.
If \fIdirection\fP is less than 0, then the search is through
previous entries, otherwise through subsequent entries.
If \fIstring\fP is found, then
the current history index is set to that history entry, and the value
returned is the offset in the line of the entry where
\fIstring\fP was found. Otherwise, nothing is changed, and a -1 is
returned.
.Fn2 int history_search_prefix "const char *string" "int direction"
Search the history for \fIstring\fP, starting at the current history
offset. The search is anchored: matching lines must begin with
\fIstring\fP. If \fIdirection\fP is less than 0, then the search is
through previous entries, otherwise through subsequent entries.
If \fIstring\fP is found, then the
current history index is set to that entry, and the return value is 0.
Otherwise, nothing is changed, and a -1 is returned.
.Fn3 int history_search_pos "const char *string" "int direction" "int pos"
Search for \fIstring\fP in the history list, starting at \fIpos\fP, an
absolute index into the list. If \fIdirection\fP is negative, the search
proceeds backward from \fIpos\fP, otherwise forward. Returns the absolute
index of the history element where \fIstring\fP was found, or -1 otherwise.
.SS Managing the History File
The History library can read the history from and write it to a file.
This section documents the functions for managing a history file.
.Fn1 int read_history "const char *filename"
Add the contents of \fIfilename\fP to the history list, a line at a time.
If \fIfilename\fP is \fBNULL\fP, then read from \fI~/.history\fP.
Returns 0 if successful, or \fBerrno\fP if not.
.Fn3 int read_history_range "const char *filename" "int from" "int to"
Read a range of lines from \fIfilename\fP, adding them to the history list.
Start reading at line \fIfrom\fP and end at \fIto\fP.
If \fIfrom\fP is zero, start at the beginning. If \fIto\fP is less than
\fIfrom\fP, then read until the end of the file. If \fIfilename\fP is
\fBNULL\fP, then read from \fI~/.history\fP. Returns 0 if successful,
or \fBerrno\fP if not.
.Fn1 int write_history "const char *filename"
Write the current history to \fIfilename\fP, overwriting \fIfilename\fP
if necessary.
If \fIfilename\fP is \fBNULL\fP, then write the history list to \fI~/.history\fP.
Returns 0 on success, or \fBerrno\fP on a read or write error.
.Fn2 int append_history "int nelements" "const char *filename"
Append the last \fInelements\fP of the history list to \fIfilename\fP.
If \fIfilename\fP is \fBNULL\fP, then append to \fI~/.history\fP.
Returns 0 on success, or \fBerrno\fP on a read or write error.
.Fn2 int history_truncate_file "const char *filename" "int nlines"
Truncate the history file \fIfilename\fP, leaving only the last
\fInlines\fP lines.
If \fIfilename\fP is \fBNULL\fP, then \fI~/.history\fP is truncated.
Returns 0 on success, or \fBerrno\fP on failure.
.SS History Expansion
These functions implement history expansion.
.Fn2 int history_expand "char *string" "char **output"
Expand \fIstring\fP, placing the result into \fIoutput\fP, a pointer
to a string. Returns:
.RS
.PD 0
.TP
0
If no expansions took place (or, if the only change in
the text was the removal of escape characters preceding the history expansion
character);
.TP
1
if expansions did take place;
.TP
-1
if there was an error in expansion;
.TP
2
if the returned line should be displayed, but not executed,
as with the \fB:p\fP modifier.
.PD
.RE
If an error ocurred in expansion, then \fIoutput\fP contains a descriptive
error message.
.Fn3 "char *" get_history_event "const char *string" "int *cindex" "int qchar"
Returns the text of the history event beginning at \fIstring\fP +
\fI*cindex\fP. \fI*cindex\fP is modified to point to after the event
specifier. At function entry, \fIcindex\fP points to the index into
\fIstring\fP where the history event specification begins. \fIqchar\fP
is a character that is allowed to end the event specification in addition
to the ``normal'' terminating characters.
.Fn1 "char **" history_tokenize "const char *string"
Return an array of tokens parsed out of \fIstring\fP, much as the
shell might.
The tokens are split on the characters in the
\fBhistory_word_delimiters\fP variable,
and shell quoting conventions are obeyed.
.Fn3 "char *" history_arg_extract "int first" "int last" "const char *string"
Extract a string segment consisting of the \fIfirst\fP through \fIlast\fP
arguments present in \fIstring\fP. Arguments are split using
\fBhistory_tokenize()\fP.
.SS History Variables
This section describes the externally-visible variables exported by
the GNU History Library.
.Vb int history_base
The logical offset of the first entry in the history list.
.Vb int history_length
The number of entries currently stored in the history list.
.Vb int history_max_entries
The maximum number of history entries. This must be changed using
\fBstifle_history()\fP.
.Vb int history_write_timestamps
If non-zero, timestamps are written to the history file, so they can be
preserved between sessions. The default value is 0, meaning that
timestamps are not saved.
.Vb char history_expansion_char
The character that introduces a history event. The default is \fB!\fP.
Setting this to 0 inhibits history expansion.
.Vb char history_subst_char
The character that invokes word substitution if found at the start of
a line. The default is \fB^\fP.
.Vb char history_comment_char
During tokenization, if this character is seen as the first character
of a word, then it and all subsequent characters up to a newline are
ignored, suppressing history expansion for the remainder of the line.
This is disabled by default.
.Vb "char *" history_word_delimiters
The characters that separate tokens for \fBhistory_tokenize()\fP.
The default value is \fB"\ \et\en()<>;&|"\fP.
.Vb "char *" history_no_expand_chars
The list of characters which inhibit history expansion if found immediately
following \fBhistory_expansion_char\fP. The default is space, tab, newline,
\fB\er\fP, and \fB=\fP.
.Vb "char *" history_search_delimiter_chars
The list of additional characters which can delimit a history search
string, in addition to space, tab, \fI:\fP and \fI?\fP in the case of
a substring search. The default is empty.
.Vb int history_quotes_inhibit_expansion
If non-zero, single-quoted words are not scanned for the history expansion
character. The default value is 0.
.Vb "rl_linebuf_func_t *" history_inhibit_expansion_function
This should be set to the address of a function that takes two arguments:
a \fBchar *\fP (\fIstring\fP)
and an \fBint\fP index into that string (\fIi\fP).
It should return a non-zero value if the history expansion starting at
\fIstring[i]\fP should not be performed; zero if the expansion should
be done.
It is intended for use by applications like \fBbash\fP that use the history
expansion character for additional purposes.
By default, this variable is set to \fBNULL\fP.
.SH FILES
.PD 0
.TP
.FN ~/.history
Default filename for reading and writing saved history
.PD
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.PD 0
.TP
\fIThe Gnu Readline Library\fP, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey
.TP
\fIThe Gnu History Library\fP, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey
.TP
\fIbash\fP(1)
.TP
\fIreadline\fP(3)
.PD
.SH AUTHORS
Brian Fox, Free Software Foundation
.br
bfox@gnu.org
.PP
Chet Ramey, Case Western Reserve University
.br
chet@ins.CWRU.Edu
.SH BUG REPORTS
If you find a bug in the
.B history
library, you should report it. But first, you should
make sure that it really is a bug, and that it appears in the latest
version of the
.B history
library that you have.
.PP
Once you have determined that a bug actually exists, mail a
bug report to \fIbug\-readline\fP@\fIgnu.org\fP.
If you have a fix, you are welcome to mail that
as well! Suggestions and `philosophical' bug reports may be mailed
to \fPbug-readline\fP@\fIgnu.org\fP or posted to the Usenet
newsgroup
.BR gnu.bash.bug .
.PP
Comments and bug reports concerning
this manual page should be directed to
.IR chet@ins.CWRU.Edu .
lib/readline/doc/history.aux
+66
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
@xrdef{Using History Interactively-title}{Using History Interactively}
@xrdef{Using History Interactively-pg}{1}
@xrdef{Using History Interactively-snt}{Chapter@tie 1}
@xrdef{History Interaction-title}{History Expansion}
@xrdef{History Interaction-pg}{1}
@xrdef{History Interaction-snt}{Section@tie 1.1}
@xrdef{Event Designators-title}{Event Designators}
@xrdef{Event Designators-pg}{1}
@xrdef{Event Designators-snt}{Section@tie 1.1.1}
@xrdef{Word Designators-title}{Word Designators}
@xrdef{Word Designators-pg}{2}
@xrdef{Word Designators-snt}{Section@tie 1.1.2}
@xrdef{Modifiers-title}{Modifiers}
@xrdef{Modifiers-pg}{2}
@xrdef{Modifiers-snt}{Section@tie 1.1.3}
@xrdef{Programming with GNU History-title}{Programming with GNU History}
@xrdef{Programming with GNU History-pg}{5}
@xrdef{Programming with GNU History-snt}{Chapter@tie 2}
@xrdef{Introduction to History-title}{Introduction to History}
@xrdef{Introduction to History-pg}{5}
@xrdef{Introduction to History-snt}{Section@tie 2.1}
@xrdef{History Storage-title}{History Storage}
@xrdef{History Storage-pg}{5}
@xrdef{History Storage-snt}{Section@tie 2.2}
@xrdef{History Functions-title}{History Functions}
@xrdef{History Functions-pg}{6}
@xrdef{History Functions-snt}{Section@tie 2.3}
@xrdef{Initializing History and State Management-title}{Initializing History and State Management}
@xrdef{Initializing History and State Management-pg}{6}
@xrdef{Initializing History and State Management-snt}{Section@tie 2.3.1}
@xrdef{History List Management-title}{History List Management}
@xrdef{History List Management-pg}{6}
@xrdef{History List Management-snt}{Section@tie 2.3.2}
@xrdef{Information About the History List-title}{Information About the History List}
@xrdef{Information About the History List-pg}{7}
@xrdef{Information About the History List-snt}{Section@tie 2.3.3}
@xrdef{Moving Around the History List-title}{Moving Around the History List}
@xrdef{Moving Around the History List-pg}{8}
@xrdef{Moving Around the History List-snt}{Section@tie 2.3.4}
@xrdef{Searching the History List-title}{Searching the History List}
@xrdef{Searching the History List-pg}{8}
@xrdef{Searching the History List-snt}{Section@tie 2.3.5}
@xrdef{Managing the History File-title}{Managing the History File}
@xrdef{Managing the History File-pg}{8}
@xrdef{Managing the History File-snt}{Section@tie 2.3.6}
@xrdef{History Expansion-title}{History Expansion}
@xrdef{History Expansion-pg}{9}
@xrdef{History Expansion-snt}{Section@tie 2.3.7}
@xrdef{History Variables-title}{History Variables}
@xrdef{History Variables-pg}{10}
@xrdef{History Variables-snt}{Section@tie 2.4}
@xrdef{History Programming Example-title}{History Programming Example}
@xrdef{History Programming Example-pg}{11}
@xrdef{History Programming Example-snt}{Section@tie 2.5}
@xrdef{Copying This Manual-title}{Copying This Manual}
@xrdef{Copying This Manual-pg}{13}
@xrdef{Copying This Manual-snt}{Appendix@tie @char65{}}
@xrdef{GNU Free Documentation License-title}{GNU Free Documentation License}
@xrdef{GNU Free Documentation License-pg}{13}
@xrdef{GNU Free Documentation License-snt}{Section@tie @char65.1}
@xrdef{Concept Index-title}{Concept Index}
@xrdef{Concept Index-pg}{21}
@xrdef{Concept Index-snt}{Appendix@tie @char66{}}
@xrdef{Function and Variable Index-title}{Function and Variable Index}
@xrdef{Function and Variable Index-pg}{23}
@xrdef{Function and Variable Index-snt}{Appendix@tie @char67{}}
lib/readline/doc/history.bt
View File
lib/readline/doc/history.cp
+6
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
\entry{history expansion}{1}{history expansion}
\entry{event designators}{1}{event designators}
\entry{history events}{1}{history events}
\entry{History Searching}{8}{History Searching}
\entry{anchored search}{8}{anchored search}
\entry{FDL, GNU Free Documentation License}{13}{FDL, GNU Free Documentation License}
lib/readline/doc/history.cps
+10
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
\initial {A}
\entry {anchored search}{8}
\initial {E}
\entry {event designators}{1}
\initial {F}
\entry {FDL, GNU Free Documentation License}{13}
\initial {H}
\entry {history events}{1}
\entry {history expansion}{1}
\entry {History Searching}{8}
lib/readline/doc/history.dvi
BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.
lib/readline/doc/history.fn
View File
lib/readline/doc/history.html
+2270
View File
File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff
lib/readline/doc/history.info
+1317
View File
File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff
lib/readline/doc/history.ky
View File
lib/readline/doc/history.log
+172
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
This is TeX, Version 3.14159 (Web2C 7.3.1) (format=tex 2001.2.12) 22 SEP 2003 09:04
**/net/granite/fs4/src/ns-engr/work/chet/src/bash/src/lib/readline/doc/history.
texi
(/net/granite/fs4/src/ns-engr/work/chet/src/bash/src/lib/readline/doc/history.t
exi (texinfo.tex Loading texinfo [version 2003-02-03.16]: Basics,
\bindingoffset=\dimen16
\normaloffset=\dimen17
\pagewidth=\dimen18
\pageheight=\dimen19
\outerhsize=\dimen20
\outervsize=\dimen21
\cornerlong=\dimen22
\cornerthick=\dimen23
\topandbottommargin=\dimen24
\headlinebox=\box16
\footlinebox=\box17
\margin=\insert252
\EMsimple=\toks12
\groupbox=\box18
\groupinvalidhelp=\toks13
\mil=\dimen25
\exdentamount=\skip18
\inmarginspacing=\skip19
pdf,
\tempnum=\count26
\lnkcount=\count27
\filename=\toks14
\filenamelength=\count28
\pgn=\count29
\toksA=\toks15
\toksB=\toks16
\toksC=\toks17
\toksD=\toks18
\boxA=\box19
\countA=\count30
fonts,
\sffam=\fam8
\textleading=\dimen26
\mainmagstep=\count31
\fontdepth=\count32
page headings,
\titlepagetopglue=\skip20
\titlepagebottomglue=\skip21
\evenheadline=\toks19
\oddheadline=\toks20
\evenfootline=\toks21
\oddfootline=\toks22
tables,
\tableindent=\dimen27
\itemindent=\dimen28
\itemmargin=\dimen29
\itemmax=\dimen30
\itemno=\count33
\multitableparskip=\skip22
\multitableparindent=\skip23
\multitablecolspace=\dimen31
\multitablelinespace=\skip24
\colcount=\count34
\savedfootnotes=\box20
conditionals, indexing,
\secondaryindent=\skip25
\partialpage=\box21
\doublecolumnhsize=\dimen32
sectioning,
\chapno=\count35
\secno=\count36
\subsecno=\count37
\subsubsecno=\count38
\appendixno=\count39
\absseclevel=\count40
\secbase=\count41
\chapheadingskip=\skip26
\secheadingskip=\skip27
\subsecheadingskip=\skip28
toc,
\tocfile=\write0
\contentsrightmargin=\skip29
\savepageno=\count42
\lastnegativepageno=\count43
\shortappendixwidth=\dimen33
\tocindent=\dimen34
environments,
\errorbox=\box22
\lispnarrowing=\skip30
\envskipamount=\skip31
\circthick=\dimen35
\cartouter=\dimen36
\cartinner=\dimen37
\normbskip=\skip32
\normpskip=\skip33
\normlskip=\skip34
\lskip=\skip35
\rskip=\skip36
\tabw=\dimen38
defuns,
\defbodyindent=\skip37
\defargsindent=\skip38
\deflastargmargin=\skip39
\parencount=\count44
macros,
\macscribble=\write1
\paramno=\count45
\macname=\toks23
cross references,
\auxfile=\write2
\savesfregister=\count46
\footnoteno=\count47
(/usr/local/share/texmf/tex/plain/dvips/epsf.tex
\epsffilein=\read0
\epsfframemargin=\dimen39
\epsfframethickness=\dimen40
\epsfrsize=\dimen41
\epsftmp=\dimen42
\epsftsize=\dimen43
\epsfxsize=\dimen44
\epsfysize=\dimen45
\pspoints=\dimen46
\epsfnoopenhelp=\toks24
)
\noepsfhelp=\toks25
localization,
\nolanghelp=\toks26
\defaultparindent=\dimen47
and turning on texinfo input format.) (history.aux)
@cpindfile=@write3
@fnindfile=@write4
@vrindfile=@write5
@tpindfile=@write6
@kyindfile=@write7
@pgindfile=@write8
(version.texi) [1
\openout2 = `history.aux'.
\openout3 = `history.cp'.
\openout4 = `history.fn'.
\openout5 = `history.vr'.
\openout6 = `history.tp'.
\openout7 = `history.ky'.
\openout8 = `history.pg'.
] [2]
(history.toc) [-1] [-2] (hsuser.texi Chapter 1
\openout0 = `history.toc'.
@btindfile=@write9
[1
\openout9 = `history.bt'.
] [2]) (hstech.texi Chapter 2
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]) Appendix A [12] (fdl.texi [13] [14]
[15] [16] [17] [18]) Appendix B [19] [20] (history.cps) Appendix C [21]
[22] (history.vrs) [23] [24] )
Here is how much of TeX's memory you used:
1399 strings out of 13013
16305 string characters out of 97233
45527 words of memory out of 263001
2271 multiletter control sequences out of 10000+0
31953 words of font info for 111 fonts, out of 400000 for 1000
19 hyphenation exceptions out of 1000
15i,6n,17p,306b,649s stack positions out of 300i,100n,500p,50000b,4000s
Output written on history.dvi (28 pages, 79868 bytes).
lib/readline/doc/history.pg
View File
lib/readline/doc/history.ps
+2404
View File
File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff
lib/readline/doc/history.toc
+23
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
\chapentry{Using History Interactively}{1}{1}
\secentry{History Expansion}{1}{1}{1}
\subsecentry{Event Designators}{1}{1}{1}{1}
\subsecentry{Word Designators}{1}{1}{2}{1}
\subsecentry{Modifiers}{1}{1}{3}{2}
\chapentry{Programming with GNU History}{2}{5}
\secentry{Introduction to History}{2}{1}{5}
\secentry{History Storage}{2}{2}{5}
\secentry{History Functions}{2}{3}{6}
\subsecentry{Initializing History and State Management}{2}{3}{1}{6}
\subsecentry{History List Management}{2}{3}{2}{6}
\subsecentry{Information About the History List}{2}{3}{3}{7}
\subsecentry{Moving Around the History List}{2}{3}{4}{7}
\subsecentry{Searching the History List}{2}{3}{5}{8}
\subsecentry{Managing the History File}{2}{3}{6}{8}
\subsecentry{History Expansion}{2}{3}{7}{9}
\secentry{History Variables}{2}{4}{10}
\secentry{History Programming Example}{2}{5}{11}
\appendixentry{Copying This Manual}{A}{13}
\secentry{GNU Free Documentation License}{A}{1}{13}
\subsecentry{ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents}{A}{1}{1}{19}
\appendixentry{Concept Index}{B}{21}
\appendixentry{Function and Variable Index}{C}{23}

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More